]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Handle "noise" macros and compiler directives.
[gnu-emacs] / doc / misc / cc-mode.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling:
3 @c
4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them.
5 @c
6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in
7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives
8 @c are significant.
9
10 @c Conventions for formatting examples:
11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty
12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise.
13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where
14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant.
15 @c o Format line number columns like this:
16 @c 1: foo
17 @c 2: bar
18 @c ^ one space
19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment
20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer
21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented.
22
23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring?
24
25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
28
29
30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
31 @comment How to make the various output formats:
32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.)
33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed.
34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
35 @ignore
36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a
37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals,
38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
39 ## Info output
40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi
41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
42
43 ## DVI output
44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so
45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex
46 ## manpage.
47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi
48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi
49
50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional)
51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi
52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
53
54 ## Plain text output
55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi
57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
59
60 ## DocBook output
61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
62 cc-mode.texi
63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
65
66 ## XML output
67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
68 cc-mode.texi
69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi
71
72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.)
73
74 ## View DVI output
75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi &
76
77 ## View HTML output
78 mozilla cc-mode.html
79 @end ignore
80
81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file.
82 @finalout
83
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode.info
85 @settitle CC Mode Manual
86 @include docstyle.texi
87 @footnotestyle end
88
89 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
90 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
91 @c Texinfo variable 'XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
92 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
93 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
94 @ifset XEMACS
95 @macro emacsman
96 xemacs
97 @end macro
98 @macro emacsmantitle
99 XEmacs User's Manual
100 @end macro
101 @macro lispref
102 lispref
103 @end macro
104 @macro lispreftitle
105 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual
106 @end macro
107 @end ifset
108
109 @ifclear XEMACS
110 @macro emacsman
111 emacs
112 @end macro
113 @macro emacsmantitle
114 GNU Emacs Manual
115 @end macro
116 @macro lispref
117 elisp
118 @end macro
119 @macro lispreftitle
120 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual
121 @end macro
122 @end ifclear
123
124
125 @macro ccmode
126 CC Mode
127 @end macro
128
129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
130 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !!
131 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region)
132 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
133
134
135 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
136 @comment
137 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode
138 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola
139 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu>
140 @comment
141 @comment Authors:
142 @comment Barry A. Warsaw
143 @comment Martin Stjernholm
144 @comment Alan Mackenzie
145 @comment
146 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org>
147 @comment
148 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
149
150 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols.
151 @defindex ss
152
153 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one.
154 @syncodeindex ss cp
155 @syncodeindex ky cp
156
157 @copying
158 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs.
159
160 Copyright @copyright{} 1995--2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
161
162 @quotation
163 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
164 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
165 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
166 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual'',
167 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license
168 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
169
170 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and
171 modify this GNU manual.''
172 @end quotation
173 @end copying
174
175 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation
176 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks.
177 @dircategory Emacs editing modes
178 @direntry
179 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C,
180 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code.
181 @end direntry
182
183 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184 @comment TeX title page
185 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
186
187 @titlepage
188 @sp 10
189
190 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.32}
191 @sp 2
192 @center A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages
193 @sp 2
194 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie
195
196 @page
197 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
198 @insertcopying
199
200 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which is distributed with Emacs,
201 or can be downloaded from @url{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/}.
202 @end titlepage
203
204 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
205 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file.
206 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual.
207 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
208
209 @summarycontents
210 @contents
211
212 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
213 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
214
215 @ifnottex
216 @top @ccmode{}
217
218 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++,
219 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike
220 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and
221 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing
222 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between
223 functions, classes, etc.; there are other packages for that.
224
225 @insertcopying
226 @end ifnottex
227
228 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
229 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
230
231 @menu
232 * Introduction::
233 * Overview::
234 * Getting Started::
235 * Commands::
236 * Font Locking::
237 * Config Basics::
238 * Custom Filling and Breaking::
239 * Custom Auto-newlines::
240 * Clean-ups::
241 * Indentation Engine Basics::
242 * Customizing Indentation::
243 * Custom Macros::
244 * Odds and Ends::
245 * Sample Init File::
246 * Performance Issues::
247 * Limitations and Known Bugs::
248 * FAQ::
249 * Updating CC Mode::
250 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports::
251 * GNU Free Documentation License::
252 * Command and Function Index::
253 * Variable Index::
254 * Concept and Key Index::
255
256 @detailmenu
257 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
258
259 Commands
260
261 * Indentation Commands::
262 * Comment Commands::
263 * Movement Commands::
264 * Filling and Breaking::
265 * Minor Modes::
266 * Electric Keys::
267 * Auto-newlines::
268 * Hungry WS Deletion::
269 * Subword Movement::
270 * Other Commands::
271
272 Font Locking
273
274 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
275 * Faces::
276 * Doc Comments::
277 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
278
279 Configuration Basics
280
281 * CC Hooks::
282 * Style Variables::
283 * Styles::
284
285 Styles
286
287 * Built-in Styles::
288 * Choosing a Style::
289 * Adding Styles::
290 * Guessing the Style::
291 * File Styles::
292
293 Customizing Auto-newlines
294
295 * Hanging Braces::
296 * Hanging Colons::
297 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
298
299 Hanging Braces
300
301 * Custom Braces::
302
303 Indentation Engine Basics
304
305 * Syntactic Analysis::
306 * Syntactic Symbols::
307 * Indentation Calculation::
308
309 Syntactic Symbols
310
311 * Function Symbols::
312 * Class Symbols::
313 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
314 * Switch Statement Symbols::
315 * Brace List Symbols::
316 * External Scope Symbols::
317 * Paren List Symbols::
318 * Literal Symbols::
319 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
320 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
321 * Java Symbols::
322 * Statement Block Symbols::
323 * K&R Symbols::
324
325 Customizing Indentation
326
327 * c-offsets-alist::
328 * Interactive Customization::
329 * Line-Up Functions::
330 * Custom Line-Up::
331 * Other Indentation::
332
333 Line-Up Functions
334
335 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
336 * List Line-Up::
337 * Operator Line-Up::
338 * Comment Line-Up::
339 * Misc Line-Up::
340
341
342 Customizing Macros
343
344 * Macro Backslashes::
345 * Macros with ;::
346 * Noise Macros::
347
348 @end detailmenu
349 @end menu
350 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
351 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top
352 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
353 @chapter Introduction
354 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
355
356 @cindex BOCM
357 @cindex history
358 @cindex awk-mode.el
359 @cindex c-mode.el
360 @cindex c++-mode.el
361
362 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C,
363 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and
364 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended
365 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM
366 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been
367 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode
368 in the (X)Emacs base.
369
370 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{}
371 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin
372 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the
373 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not
374 originally contain the font lock support for its languages; that
375 was added in version 5.30.
376
377 This manual describes @ccmode{}
378 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the
379 version 5.32.
380 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically
381
382 @ccmode{} supports the editing of C, C++, Objective-C,
383 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like
384 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD
385 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this
386 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for
387 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as
388 uniformly integrated as the other languages.
389
390 @findex c-mode
391 @findex c++-mode
392 @findex objc-mode
393 @findex java-mode
394 @findex idl-mode
395 @findex pike-mode
396 @findex awk-mode
397 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top
398 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and
399 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and
400 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode},
401 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are
402 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for
403 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}.
404
405 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in
406 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd
407 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously
408 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development.
409
410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
411 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top
412 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual
413 @chapter Overview of the Manual
414 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
415
416 @noindent
417 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this
418 one).
419
420 @noindent
421 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of
422 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it).
423
424 @itemize @bullet
425 @item
426 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all
427 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from
428 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you
429 how to customize these features.
430
431 @item
432 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to
433 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped
434 over at a first reading.
435 @end itemize
436
437 @noindent
438 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize}
439 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter
440 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in
441 increasing detail.
442
443 @itemize @bullet
444 @item
445 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write
446 customizations: whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither,
447 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and
448 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies.
449
450 @item
451 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various
452 features of @ccmode{}.
453
454 @item
455 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you
456 in creating your own customization.
457 @end itemize
458
459 @noindent
460 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly
461 into any of the previous chunks.
462
463 @itemize @bullet
464 @item
465 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known
466 bugs/limitations.
467
468 @item
469 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions.
470
471 @item
472 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{}
473 project: whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports.
474 @end itemize
475
476 @noindent
477 Finally, there are the customary indices.
478
479 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
480 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top
481 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
482 @chapter Getting Started
483 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
484
485 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should
486 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not
487 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy
488 (see below).
489
490 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter
491 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities.
492
493 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of
494 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to
495 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often
496 want to change:
497
498 @table @asis
499 @item c-basic-offset
500 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{}
501 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize
502 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
503
504 @example
505 (setq c-basic-offset 6)
506 @end example
507
508 @item The (indentation) style
509 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default,
510 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of
511 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in
512 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{}
513 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in
514 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either
515 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}:
516
517 @example
518 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
519 (awk-mode . "awk")
520 (other . "linux")))
521 @end example
522
523 @item Electric Indentation
524 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or
525 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can
526 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric
527 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same
528 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by
529 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There
530 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}:
531
532 @example
533 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil)
534 @end example
535
536 @noindent
537 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the
538 section @ref{Minor Modes}.
539
540 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line
541 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you
542 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that
543 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet
544 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has
545 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}:
546
547 @example
548 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent ()
549 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
550 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent)
551 @end example
552
553 @noindent
554 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and
555 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described
556 in @ref{CC Hooks}.
557 @end table
558
559 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before}
560 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of
561 @code{desktop-read}.
562
563 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more
564 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start
565 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}.
566
567 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see
568 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if
569 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to
570 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete
571 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs.
572 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See
573 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net}
574 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility
575 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}).
576
577 @deffn Command c-version
578 @findex version (c-)
579 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C
580 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in
581 the echo area:
582
583 @example
584 Using CC Mode version 5.XX
585 @end example
586
587 @noindent
588 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number.
589 @end deffn
590
591 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
592 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top
593 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
594 @chapter Commands
595 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
596
597 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains
598 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as
599 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both
600 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters
601 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the
602 buffer, also do other things.
603
604 You might well want to review
605 @ifset XEMACS
606 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
607 @end ifset
608 @ifclear XEMACS
609 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}},
610 @end ifclear
611 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis
612 structures.
613
614
615 @menu
616 * Indentation Commands::
617 * Comment Commands::
618 * Movement Commands::
619 * Filling and Breaking::
620 * Minor Modes::
621 * Electric Keys::
622 * Auto-newlines::
623 * Hungry WS Deletion::
624 * Subword Movement::
625 * Other Commands::
626 @end menu
627
628 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
629 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands
630 @comment node-name, next, previous,up
631 @section Indentation Commands
632 @cindex indentation
633 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
634
635 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you
636 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other
637 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You
638 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects
639 of your changes.
640
641 @cindex GNU indent program
642 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list}
643 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is
644 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then
645 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this,
646 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
647 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
648
649 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
650 code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
651 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
652
653 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
654 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
655 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
656 hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
657 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
658 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
659 out correctly most of the time, though.
660
661 Some macros, when invoked, ''have their own semicolon''. To get the
662 next line indented correctly, rather than as a continuation line,
663 @xref{Macros with ;}.
664
665 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When
666 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to
667 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region.
668
669 These commands indent code:
670
671 @table @asis
672 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command})
673 @kindex TAB
674 @findex c-indent-command
675 @findex indent-command (c-)
676 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know
677 about it for normal use.
678
679 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the
680 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
681 Basics}):
682
683 @itemize @bullet
684 @item
685 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents
686 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument
687 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire
688 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a
689 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.}
690 that begins at the line's left margin.
691
692 @item
693 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra
694 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a
695 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1,
696 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation.
697 @end itemize
698
699 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With
700 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace
701 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines
702 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard
703 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real
704 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if
705 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,,@emacsman{},
706 @emacsmantitle{}}.
707
708 @defopt c-tab-always-indent
709 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-)
710 @cindex literal
711 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates.
712 @itemize @bullet
713 @item
714 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the
715 current line.
716 @item
717 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is
718 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line.
719 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of
720 spaces; see below) at point.
721 @item
722 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point
723 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted.
724 @end itemize
725 @end defopt
726
727 @defopt c-insert-tab-function
728 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-)
729 @findex tab-to-tab-stop
730 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually
731 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is
732 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab
733 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on
734 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set
735 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get
736 hard tab stops when indenting.
737 @end defopt
738 @end table
739
740 @noindent
741 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the
742 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine
743 Basics}):
744 @itemize @bullet
745 @item
746 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines
747 according to their syntactic context;
748 @item
749 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as
750 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't
751 very useful in this case.
752 @end itemize
753
754 @table @asis
755 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp})
756 @kindex C-M-q
757 @findex c-indent-exp
758 @findex indent-exp (c-)
759 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that
760 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression
761 you want to indent.
762
763 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun})
764 @kindex C-c C-q
765 @findex c-indent-defun
766 @findex indent-defun (c-)
767 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
768 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
769 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
770 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
771 must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
772 brace.
773
774 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
775 @kindex C-M-\
776 @findex indent-region
777 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command,
778 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point
779 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent.
780
781 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function})
782 @kindex C-M-h
783 @findex c-mark-function
784 @findex mark-function (c-)
785 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking
786 the current top-level function or class definition as the current
787 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on
788 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method.
789 @end table
790
791 These variables are also useful when indenting code:
792
793 @defopt indent-tabs-mode
794 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation
795 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's
796 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used.
797 @end defopt
798
799 @defopt c-progress-interval
800 @vindex progress-interval (c-)
801 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a
802 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to
803 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how
804 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed.
805 @end defopt
806
807 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
808 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands
809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
810 @section Comment Commands
811 @cindex comments (insertion of)
812 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
813
814 @table @asis
815 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region})
816 @kindex C-c C-c
817 @findex comment-region
818 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a
819 negative argument, it does the opposite: it deletes the comment
820 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU
821 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't
822 actually part of @ccmode{}; it is given a @ccmode{} binding for
823 convenience.
824
825 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.})
826 @kindex M-;
827 @findex comment-dwim
828 @findex indent-for-comment
829 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there
830 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column}
831 @ifclear XEMACS
832 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual})
833 @end ifclear
834 @ifset XEMACS
835 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual})
836 @end ifset
837 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the
838 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line,
839 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs
840 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables:
841
842 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist
843 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-)
844 @vindex comment-column
845 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts
846 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and
847 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line.
848 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to
849 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type
850 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column
851 specified by @code{comment-column}.
852
853 See the documentation string for a full description of this
854 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}).
855 @end defopt
856
857 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
858 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-)
859 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will
860 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
861 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments.
862 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only
863 lines you can get that by setting
864 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}.
865
866 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then
867 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only
868 lines.
869 @end defopt
870 @end table
871
872 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
873 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands
874 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
875 @section Movement Commands
876 @cindex movement
877 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
878
879 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code.
880
881 @table @asis
882 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun})
883 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun})
884 @findex c-beginning-of-defun
885 @findex c-end-of-defun
886 @vindex c-defun-tactic
887 @vindex defun-tactic (c-)
888
889 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other
890 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block
891 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you
892 can give these commands a repeat count.
893
894 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is
895 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such
896 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two
897 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual
898 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to
899 move at all.
900
901 By default, these commands will recognize functions contained within a
902 @dfn{declaration scope} such as a C++ @code{class} or @code{namespace}
903 construct, should the point start inside it. If @ccmode fails to find
904 function beginnings or ends inside the current declaration scope, it
905 will search the enclosing scopes. If you want @ccmode to recognize
906 functions only at the top level@footnote{this was @ccmode{}'s
907 behavior prior to version 5.32.}, set @code{c-defun-tactic} to
908 @code{t}.
909
910 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands
911 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they
912 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun
913 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{},
914 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information.
915
916 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun})
917 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun})
918 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode)
919 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode)
920 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun
921 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-)
922 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun
923 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-)
924 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These
925 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely
926 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}.
927
928 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which
929 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and
930 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some
931 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode.
932
933 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement})
934 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement})
935 @kindex M-a
936 @kindex M-e
937 @findex c-beginning-of-statement
938 @findex c-end-of-statement
939 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-)
940 @findex end-of-statement (c-)
941 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point
942 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement,
943 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or
944 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n}
945 means move over @var{n} statements.
946
947 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more
948 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements.
949
950 When called from a program, these functions take three optional
951 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the
952 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying
953 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline
954 strings.
955
956 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional})
957 @kindex C-c C-u
958 @findex c-up-conditional
959 @findex up-conditional (c-)
960 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark
961 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative
962 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor
963 conditional.
964
965 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
966 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going
967 forward.
968
969 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
970 preprocessor statements.
971
972 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else}
973 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else
974 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-)
975 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
976 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
977
978 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional}
979 @findex c-down-conditional
980 @findex down-conditional (c-)
981 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving
982 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
983 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor
984 conditional.
985
986 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the
987 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward.
988
989 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else}
990 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else
991 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-)
992 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else}
993 lines. Normally those lines are ignored.
994
995 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional})
996 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional})
997 @kindex C-c C-p
998 @kindex C-c C-n
999 @findex c-backward-conditional
1000 @findex c-forward-conditional
1001 @findex backward-conditional (c-)
1002 @findex forward-conditional (c-)
1003 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving
1004 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a
1005 negative argument, move in the opposite direction.
1006
1007 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have
1008 preprocessor statements.
1009
1010 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature}
1011 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature}
1012 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature
1013 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature
1014 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1015 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-)
1016 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1017 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1018 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1019 underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1020
1021 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1022 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
1023 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction.
1024
1025 Note that these two commands have been superseded by
1026 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword
1027 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1028 @end table
1029
1030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1031 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands
1032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1033 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands
1034 @cindex text filling
1035 @cindex line breaking
1036 @cindex comment handling
1037 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1038
1039 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1040 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1041 is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1042 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc.@: wherever
1043 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1044 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
1045 and so on.
1046
1047 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and
1048 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and
1049 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have
1050 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1051
1052 @findex auto-fill-mode
1053 @cindex Auto Fill mode
1054 @cindex paragraph filling
1055 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1056 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1057 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1058 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1059 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1060 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
1061 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}
1062 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}.
1063
1064 @table @asis
1065 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph})
1066 @kindex M-q
1067 @findex c-fill-paragraph
1068 @findex fill-paragraph (c-)
1069 @cindex Javadoc markup
1070 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
1071 This command fills multiline string literals and both block
1072 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words
1073 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc
1074 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode.
1075
1076 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of
1077 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if
1078 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays
1079 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its
1080 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line.
1081
1082 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{}
1083 buffers.
1084
1085 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line})
1086 @kindex M-j
1087 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line
1088 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-)
1089 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If
1090 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line
1091 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before
1092 the line break. It is the replacement for
1093 @code{indent-new-comment-line}.
1094
1095 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break}
1096 @findex c-context-line-break
1097 @findex context-line-break (c-)
1098 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a
1099 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line
1100 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's
1101 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts
1102 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally
1103 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken.
1104 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a
1105 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a
1106 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are
1107 valid.}.
1108
1109 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be
1110 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of
1111 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to
1112 this function. @xref{Sample Init File}.
1113
1114 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line}
1115 @findex c-context-open-line
1116 @findex context-open-line (c-)
1117 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1118 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1119 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1120 line break.
1121 @end table
1122
1123
1124 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1125 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands
1126 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1127 @section Minor Modes
1128 @cindex Minor Modes
1129 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1130
1131 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might
1132 find useful while writing new code or editing old code:
1133
1134 @table @asis
1135 @item electric mode
1136 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as
1137 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when
1138 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1139 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1140 @item auto-newline mode
1141 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1142 them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1143 when electric mode is disabled.
1144 @item hungry-delete mode
1145 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
1146 key: for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by
1147 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the
1148 last statement.
1149 @item subword mode
1150 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1151 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1152 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1153 E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1154 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1155 @item syntactic-indentation mode
1156 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
1157 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic
1158 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as
1159 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps
1160 of @code{c-basic-offset}.
1161 @end table
1162
1163 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys},
1164 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement},
1165 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}.
1166
1167 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can
1168 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favorite
1169 combination of them (@pxref{Sample Init File}). By default, when
1170 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode
1171 are enabled but the other three modes are disabled.
1172
1173 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor
1174 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name,
1175 one letter for each enabled minor mode: @samp{l} for electric mode,
1176 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and
1177 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see
1178 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of
1179 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}.
1180
1181 Here are the commands to toggle these modes:
1182
1183 @table @asis
1184 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state})
1185 @kindex C-c C-l
1186 @findex c-toggle-electric-state
1187 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-)
1188 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it
1189 also suppresses auto-newline mode.
1190
1191 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline})
1192 @kindex C-c C-a
1193 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline
1194 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-)
1195 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on,
1196 it also enables electric minor mode.
1197
1198 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.}
1199 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state
1200 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-)
1201 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode.
1202
1203 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.}
1204 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state
1205 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-)
1206 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes.
1207
1208 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode})
1209 @kindex C-c C-w
1210 @findex subword-mode
1211 Toggle subword mode.
1212
1213 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation}
1214 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation
1215 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-)
1216 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode.
1217 @end table
1218
1219 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called
1220 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A
1221 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the
1222 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will
1223 turn it (or them) off.
1224
1225
1226 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1227 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands
1228 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1229 @section Electric Keys and Keywords
1230 @cindex electric characters
1231 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1232
1233 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior: as well as
1234 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as
1235 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to
1236 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few
1237 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action.
1238
1239 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling
1240 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}).
1241
1242 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when
1243 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string
1244 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when
1245 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it
1246 does by default).
1247
1248 These keys and keywords are:
1249 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more
1250 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get
1251 @c fixed in the code sometime.
1252
1253 @table @kbd
1254 @item #
1255 @kindex #
1256 @findex c-electric-pound
1257 @findex electric-pound (c-)
1258 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior
1259 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-)
1260 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the
1261 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro
1262 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior}
1263 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list
1264 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft},
1265 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column
1266 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions.
1267
1268 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment,
1269 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable
1270 character.
1271 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment
1272 @c reindentation.
1273
1274 @item *
1275 @kindex *
1276 @itemx /
1277 @kindex /
1278 @findex c-electric-star
1279 @findex electric-star (c-)
1280 @findex c-electric-slash
1281 @findex electric-slash (c-)
1282 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1283 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1284 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1285 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1286 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1287 whitespace before it).
1288
1289 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
1290 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the
1291 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get
1292 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1293
1294 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not
1295 electric.
1296
1297 @item <
1298 @kindex <
1299 @itemx >
1300 @kindex >
1301 @findex c-electric-lt-gt
1302 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-)
1303 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is
1304 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++
1305 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other
1306 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>}
1307 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line
1308 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not
1309 electric.
1310
1311 @item (
1312 @kindex (
1313 @itemx )
1314 @kindex )
1315 @findex c-electric-paren
1316 @findex electric-paren (c-)
1317 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to
1318 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful
1319 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned
1320 automatically.
1321
1322 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically
1323 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to
1324 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument
1325 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to
1326 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1327
1328 @item @{
1329 @kindex @{
1330 @itemx @}
1331 @kindex @}
1332 @findex c-electric-brace
1333 @findex electric-brace (c-)
1334 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the
1335 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1336 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1337 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace
1338 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances.
1339 @xref{Clean-ups}.
1340
1341 @item :
1342 @kindex :
1343 @findex c-electric-colon
1344 @findex electric-colon (c-)
1345 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the
1346 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if
1347 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you
1348 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default
1349 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope
1350 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1351
1352 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation,
1353 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups.
1354 @xref{Other Commands}.
1355
1356 @item ;
1357 @kindex ;
1358 @itemx ,
1359 @kindex ,
1360 @findex c-electric-semi&comma
1361 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-)
1362 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma})
1363 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if
1364 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}.
1365 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline
1366 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again
1367 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}.
1368
1369 @end table
1370
1371 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement
1372 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-)
1373
1374 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are
1375 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that
1376 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one:
1377 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and
1378 @code{finally} (only in Java).
1379
1380 An example:
1381
1382 @example
1383 @group
1384 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1385 if (a[i])
1386 res += a[i]->offset;
1387 else
1388 @end group
1389 @end example
1390
1391 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if},
1392 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically
1393 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only
1394 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a
1395 continuation of the preceding @code{if}.
1396
1397 @vindex abbrev-mode
1398 @findex abbrev-mode
1399 @cindex Abbrev mode
1400 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}})
1401 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language
1402 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements.
1403 @end deffn
1404
1405
1406 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1407 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands
1408 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1409 @section Auto-newline Insertion
1410 @cindex auto-newline
1411 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1412
1413 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor
1414 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain
1415 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a
1416 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the
1417 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both.
1418
1419 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1420
1421 @itemize @bullet
1422 @item
1423 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1424 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1425 @samp{C/la}).
1426
1427 @item
1428 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace
1429 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline.
1430
1431 @item
1432 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to
1433 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.)
1434
1435 @item
1436 @cindex literal
1437 @cindex syntactic whitespace
1438 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A
1439 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro
1440 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1441 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1442
1443 @item
1444 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1445 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1446 @end itemize
1447
1448 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get
1449 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style
1450 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably
1451 won't have to bother.
1452
1453 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one,
1454 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}.
1455 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can
1456 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess
1457 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a
1458 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of
1459 clean-ups listed by key.
1460
1461
1462 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1463 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands
1464 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1465 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace
1466 @cindex hungry-deletion
1467 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1468
1469 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can
1470 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace
1471 either before point or after point in a single operation.
1472 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or
1473 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the
1474 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example,
1475 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed
1476 @kbd{C-j}.
1477
1478 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely
1479 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all}
1480 your editing modes!
1481
1482 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the
1483 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete
1484 key''. This is discussed in more detail below.
1485
1486 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion:
1487
1488 @table @asis
1489 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d}
1490 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x
1491 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command
1492 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding
1493 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This
1494 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry
1495 deletion.
1496
1497 @table @asis
1498 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace})
1499 @kindex DEL
1500 @findex c-electric-backspace
1501 @findex electric-backspace (c-)
1502 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When
1503 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in
1504 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix
1505 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just
1506 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the
1507 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function},
1508 passing it the prefix argument, if any.)
1509
1510 @item @code{c-backspace-function}
1511 @vindex c-backspace-function
1512 @vindex backspace-function (c-)
1513 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify
1514 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't
1515 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default
1516 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify}
1517 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which
1518 deletes a single character.
1519
1520 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward})
1521 @kindex C-d
1522 @findex c-electric-delete-forward
1523 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-)
1524 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like
1525 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it
1526 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it
1527 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it
1528 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix
1529 argument.)
1530
1531 @item @code{c-delete-function}
1532 @vindex c-delete-function
1533 @vindex delete-function (c-)
1534 @findex delete-char
1535 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it
1536 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The
1537 default value is @code{delete-char}.
1538 @end table
1539
1540 @item Using Distinct Bindings
1541 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to
1542 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and
1543 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences
1544 rather than using the minor mode toggling.
1545
1546 @table @asis
1547 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.}
1548 @kindex C-c C-<backspace>
1549 @kindex C-c <backspace>
1550 @kindex C-c C-DEL
1551 @kindex C-c DEL
1552 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards
1553 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-)
1554 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless
1555 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1556 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more
1557 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at
1558 a character terminal.
1559
1560 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward})
1561 @kindex C-c C-d
1562 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE>
1563 @kindex C-c <DELETE>
1564 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward
1565 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-)
1566 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless
1567 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound
1568 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the
1569 same reason as for @key{DEL} above.
1570 @end table
1571 @end table
1572
1573 @kindex <delete>
1574 @kindex <backspace>
1575
1576 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we
1577 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly
1578 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to
1579 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using.
1580
1581 @findex c-electric-delete
1582 @findex electric-delete (c-)
1583 @findex c-hungry-delete
1584 @findex hungry-delete (c-)
1585 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward
1586 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to
1587 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to
1588 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by
1589 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard
1590 XEmacs variable.
1591 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...).
1592 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do
1593 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it
1594 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly,
1595 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to
1596 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by
1597 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}.
1598
1599 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
1600
1601 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and
1602 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment,
1603 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}}
1604 etc. If you need to change the bindings through
1605 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt
1606 its extended bindings accordingly.
1607
1608 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either
1609 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes
1610 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings
1611 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this
1612 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable.
1613
1614 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can
1615 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not
1616 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having
1617 trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1618
1619
1620 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1621 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands
1622 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1623 @section Subword Movement and Editing
1624 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1625
1626 @cindex nomenclature
1627 @cindex subword
1628 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1629 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1630 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1631 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1632 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
1633 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples:
1634
1635 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}}
1636 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1637 @iftex
1638 @item @b{Nomenclature}
1639 @tab @b{Subwords}
1640 @end iftex
1641 @ifnottex
1642 @item Nomenclature
1643 @tab Subwords
1644 @item ---------------------------------------------------------
1645 @end ifnottex
1646 @item @samp{GtkWindow}
1647 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window}
1648 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass}
1649 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class}
1650 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext}
1651 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}
1652 @end multitable
1653
1654 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and
1655 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a
1656 nomenclature and treat them as separate words:
1657
1658 @findex c-forward-subword
1659 @findex forward-subword (c-)
1660 @findex c-backward-subword
1661 @findex backward-subword (c-)
1662 @findex c-mark-subword
1663 @findex mark-subword (c-)
1664 @findex c-kill-subword
1665 @findex kill-subword (c-)
1666 @findex c-backward-kill-subword
1667 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-)
1668 @findex c-transpose-subwords
1669 @findex transpose-subwords (c-)
1670 @findex c-capitalize-subword
1671 @findex capitalize-subword (c-)
1672 @findex c-upcase-subword
1673 @findex upcase-subword (c-)
1674 @findex c-downcase-subword
1675 @findex downcase-subword (c-)
1676 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40
1677 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7
1678 @iftex
1679 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command}
1680 @end iftex
1681 @ifnottex
1682 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command
1683 @item ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1684 @end ifnottex
1685 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword}
1686 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword}
1687 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword}
1688 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword}
1689 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword}
1690 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords}
1691 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword}
1692 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword}
1693 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword}
1694 @end multitable
1695
1696 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented
1697 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have
1698 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented
1699 commands.
1700
1701 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the
1702 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your
1703 @file{.emacs}:
1704
1705 @example
1706 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
1707 (lambda () (subword-mode 1)))
1708 @end example
1709
1710 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{}
1711 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}.
1712
1713 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1714 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands
1715 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1716 @section Other Commands
1717 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1718
1719 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else:
1720
1721 @table @asis
1722 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style})
1723 @kindex C-c .
1724 @findex c-set-style
1725 @findex set-style (c-)
1726 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this:
1727
1728 @example
1729 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}}
1730 @end example
1731
1732 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the
1733 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the
1734 ones you define yourself.
1735
1736 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your
1737 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes,
1738 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}.
1739
1740 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}.
1741 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator})
1742 @kindex C-c :
1743 @findex c-scope-operator
1744 @findex scope-operator (c-)
1745 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope
1746 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion.
1747 @kbd{C-c :} does just this.
1748
1749 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region})
1750 @kindex C-c C-\
1751 @findex c-backslash-region
1752 @findex backslash-region (c-)
1753 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in
1754 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros.
1755
1756 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns
1757 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and
1758 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it
1759 deletes any backslashes.
1760
1761 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If
1762 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash
1763 (if any) at the end of the previous line.
1764
1765 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}.
1766 @end table
1767
1768 @noindent
1769 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break}
1770 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit
1771 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it
1772 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end
1773 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the
1774 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside
1775 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother
1776 with the trailing backslashes.
1777
1778 @table @asis
1779 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand})
1780 @kindex C-c C-e
1781 @findex c-macro-expand
1782 @findex macro-expand (c-)
1783 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region,
1784 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it
1785 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix
1786 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region
1787 with the expansion.
1788
1789 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key
1790 sequence is not bound in these other modes.
1791
1792 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it
1793 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up
1794 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or
1795 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums.
1796 @end table
1797
1798 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1799 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top
1800 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1801 @chapter Font Locking
1802 @cindex font locking
1803 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1804
1805 @cindex Font Lock mode
1806
1807 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by
1808 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you
1809 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments,
1810 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them
1811 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font
1812 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1813 @ccmode{} buffers.
1814
1815 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1816 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1817 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1818 sections apply to the other languages.
1819
1820 @menu
1821 * Font Locking Preliminaries::
1822 * Faces::
1823 * Doc Comments::
1824 * AWK Mode Font Locking::
1825 @end menu
1826
1827
1828 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1829 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking
1830 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1831 @section Font Locking Preliminaries
1832 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1833
1834 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided
1835 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}.
1836 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked
1837 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK
1838 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has
1839 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages
1840 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means
1841 that it's a bit different in most languages now.
1842
1843 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide
1844 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1845 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like
1846 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great
1847 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1848 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1849 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1850 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1851 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,,
1852 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}).
1853
1854 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration
1855
1856 The decoration levels are used as follows:
1857
1858 @enumerate
1859 @comment 1
1860 @item
1861 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor
1862 directives (in the languages that use cpp).
1863
1864 @comment 2
1865 @item
1866 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple
1867 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables
1868 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the
1869 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation
1870 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to
1871 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}).
1872
1873 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest
1874 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns.
1875
1876 @comment 3
1877 @item
1878 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that
1879 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The
1880 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user
1881 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore
1882 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns
1883 that are uncertain.
1884
1885 @cindex Lazy Lock mode
1886 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode
1887
1888 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock
1889 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only
1890 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole
1891 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary
1892 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
1893 @end enumerate
1894
1895 @cindex user defined types
1896 @cindex types, user defined
1897
1898 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide
1899 additional regexps to match those you use:
1900
1901 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types
1902 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types
1903 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types
1904 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types
1905 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types
1906 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types
1907 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1908 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1909 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1910 e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1911 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1912 single identifier.
1913
1914 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime
1915 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for
1916 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++.
1917 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names
1918 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages.
1919
1920 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for
1921 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to
1922 recognize types.
1923 @end defopt
1924
1925
1926 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1927 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking
1928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1929 @section Faces
1930 @cindex faces
1931 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
1932
1933 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages
1934 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra
1935 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face
1936 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide
1937 @code{font-lock-warning-face}.
1938
1939 @itemize @bullet
1940 @item
1941 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1942 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}.
1943
1944 @item
1945 @vindex font-lock-doc-face
1946 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face
1947 @vindex font-lock-comment-face
1948 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments})
1949 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or
1950 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If
1951 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used.
1952
1953 @item
1954 @vindex font-lock-string-face
1955 String and character literals are fontified in
1956 @code{font-lock-string-face}.
1957
1958 @item
1959 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face
1960 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}.
1961
1962 @item
1963 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face
1964 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in
1965 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also
1966 used for preprocessor defines with arguments.
1967
1968 @item
1969 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face
1970 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such
1971 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also
1972 used for preprocessor defines without arguments.
1973
1974 @item
1975 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1976 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1977 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it
1978 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the
1979 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's
1980 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in
1981 them somewhere.
1982
1983 @item
1984 @vindex font-lock-type-face
1985 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user
1986 defined) and classes in type contexts.
1987
1988 @item
1989 @vindex font-lock-constant-face
1990 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
1991 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists,
1992 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise.
1993
1994 @item
1995 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like
1996 labels.
1997
1998 @item
1999 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like
2000 labels.
2001
2002 @item
2003 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face
2004 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2005 @vindex font-lock-reference-face
2006 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2007 exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2008 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2009
2010 @item
2011 @vindex font-lock-warning-face
2012 @vindex c-invalid-face
2013 @vindex invalid-face (c-)
2014 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with
2015 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions
2016 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special
2017 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by
2018 default.
2019
2020 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives,
2021 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2022 @end itemize
2023
2024
2025 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2026 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking
2027 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2028 @section Documentation Comments
2029 @cindex documentation comments
2030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2031
2032 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2033 specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2034 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2035 the special markup inside them.
2036
2037 @defopt c-doc-comment-style
2038 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2039 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2040 style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2041
2042 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2043 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
2044 conflict).
2045
2046 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment
2047 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then
2048 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as
2049 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol @code{other} is looked up
2050 and its value is used instead.
2051
2052 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2053 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}.
2054
2055 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2056 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2057 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2058 in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2059 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2060 reinitialize.
2061
2062 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style
2063 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-)
2064 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are
2065 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in
2066 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style}
2067 afterwards to redo that work.
2068 @end defopt
2069
2070 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment
2071 styles:
2072
2073 @table @code
2074 @item javadoc
2075 @cindex Javadoc markup
2076 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java.
2077
2078 @item autodoc
2079 @cindex Pike autodoc markup
2080 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike.
2081
2082 @item gtkdoc
2083 @cindex GtkDoc markup
2084 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community.
2085 @end table
2086
2087 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for
2088 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and
2089 Bug Reports}).
2090
2091 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use
2092 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function
2093 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use
2094 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to
2095 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode
2096 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see
2097 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}.
2098
2099 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider
2100 contributing it: send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
2101
2102
2103 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2104 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking
2105 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2106 @section AWK Mode Font Locking
2107 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2108
2109 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any
2110 other programming mode. @xref{Faces for Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs
2111 Lisp Reference Manual}.
2112
2113 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in
2114 AWK mode:
2115
2116 @table @asis
2117 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}
2118 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are
2119 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system
2120 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as
2121 @code{"/dev/stderr"}).
2122
2123 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs)
2124 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}.
2125 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for
2126 standard functions (such as @code{match}).
2127
2128 @item @code{font-lock-string-face}
2129 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings,
2130 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK
2131 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}).
2132
2133 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs)
2134 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK
2135 constructs:
2136
2137 @itemize @bullet
2138 @item
2139 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening
2140 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in
2141 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a
2142 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face
2143 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct.
2144
2145 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions
2146 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line
2147 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly),
2148 rather than the text up to the next string quote.
2149
2150 @item
2151 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling
2152 a user function. The last character of the function name and the
2153 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will
2154 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an
2155 identifier precedes a parenthesized expression. Unfortunately.
2156
2157 @item
2158 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an
2159 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted.
2160 @end itemize
2161 @end table
2162
2163
2164 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2165 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top
2166 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2167 @chapter Configuration Basics
2168 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2169
2170 @cindex Emacs Initialization File
2171 @cindex Configuration
2172 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and
2173 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't
2174 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs
2175 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or
2176 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some
2177 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For
2178 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}''
2179 throughout the rest of the manual.
2180
2181 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as
2182 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known
2183 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group,
2184 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style
2185 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and
2186 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}.
2187
2188 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the
2189 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page.
2190 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest
2191 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''.
2192
2193 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way
2194 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list:
2195 @itemize @w{}
2196 @item
2197 @table @asis
2198 @item Style
2199 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.}
2200 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface''
2201 @itemx Hook
2202 @itemx File Local Variable setting
2203 @end table
2204 @end itemize
2205
2206 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration
2207 settings:
2208
2209 @table @asis
2210 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface''
2211 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top
2212 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer,
2213 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least,
2214 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to
2215 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first
2216 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read}
2217 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For
2218 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus:
2219
2220 @example
2221 (setq c-basic-offset 4)
2222 @end example
2223
2224 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead,
2225 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this,
2226 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}.
2227 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}.
2228 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual.
2229 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your
2230 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit
2231 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after}
2232 the customizations.
2233
2234 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the
2235 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}.
2236 @xref{Built-in Styles}.
2237
2238 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is
2239 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{}
2240 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers.
2241 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s
2242 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles.
2243
2244 @item Hooks
2245 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want
2246 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances.
2247 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main
2248 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports; any
2249 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a
2250 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization
2251 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the
2252 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you
2253 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C
2254 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this:
2255
2256 @example
2257 @group
2258 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2259 (setq c-basic-offset 3))
2260 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2261
2262 (defun my-java-mode-hook ()
2263 (setq c-basic-offset 6))
2264 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook)
2265 @end group
2266 @end example
2267
2268 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks.
2269
2270 @item Styles
2271 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations
2272 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each
2273 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default.
2274 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally,
2275 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing
2276 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free
2277 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this
2278 in your @file{.emacs} file:
2279
2280 @example
2281 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java")
2282 (awk-mode . "awk")
2283 (other . "free-group-style")))
2284 @end example
2285
2286 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how
2287 to create them.
2288
2289 @item File Local Variable setting
2290 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an
2291 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list},
2292 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File
2293 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2294
2295 @item File Styles
2296 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism
2297 described above, which applies to an individual source file.
2298 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables
2299 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File
2300 Variables,,,@emacsman{}}).
2301
2302 @item Hooks with Styles
2303 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For
2304 example, if your team were developing a product which required a
2305 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the
2306 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You
2307 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}:
2308
2309 @example
2310 @group
2311 (defun my-c-mode-hook ()
2312 (c-set-style
2313 (if (and (buffer-file-name)
2314 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name)))
2315 "linux"
2316 "free-group-style")))
2317 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook)
2318 @end group
2319 @end example
2320
2321 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member
2322 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the
2323 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could
2324 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2325 @file{.emacs}:
2326
2327 @example
2328 @group
2329 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline ()
2330 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
2331 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline)
2332 @end group
2333 @end example
2334 @end table
2335
2336 @menu
2337 * CC Hooks::
2338 * Style Variables::
2339 * Styles::
2340 @end menu
2341
2342 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2343 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics
2344 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2345 @section Hooks
2346 @cindex mode hooks
2347 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2348 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2349 @c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2350 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2351 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2352 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
2353 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note:
2354 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node.
2355
2356 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the
2357 mode for your coding style. The main hook is
2358 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your
2359 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own
2360 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the
2361 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization
2362 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables
2363 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in
2364 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the
2365 standard Emacs conventions.
2366
2367 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the
2368 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls
2369 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific
2370 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override
2371 those set by @code{c-default-style}.
2372
2373 @defvar c-initialization-hook
2374 @vindex initialization-hook (c-)
2375 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized.
2376 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any
2377 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2378 @end defvar
2379
2380 @defvar c-mode-common-hook
2381 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-)
2382 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the
2383 language specific hook.
2384 @end defvar
2385
2386 @defvar c-mode-hook
2387 @defvarx c++-mode-hook
2388 @defvarx objc-mode-hook
2389 @defvarx java-mode-hook
2390 @defvarx idl-mode-hook
2391 @defvarx pike-mode-hook
2392 @defvarx awk-mode-hook
2393 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the
2394 last thing when you enter that language mode.
2395 @end defvar
2396
2397 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give
2398 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the
2399 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't
2400 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded.
2401
2402 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs}
2403 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the
2404 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks.
2405 @xref{Sample Init File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs}
2406 file.
2407
2408 @example
2409 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
2410 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes
2411 (no-case-fold-search)
2412 )
2413 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
2414 @end example
2415
2416 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2417 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics
2418 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2419 @section Style Variables
2420 @cindex styles
2421 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2422
2423 @cindex style variables
2424 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2425 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2426 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2427 values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2428 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2429
2430 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
2431
2432 @itemize @bullet
2433 @item
2434 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they
2435 can instead be made global by setting
2436 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is
2437 initialized.
2438
2439 @item
2440 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior
2441 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-)
2442 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions
2443 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the
2444 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a
2445 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it
2446 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its
2447 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of
2448 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden
2449 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was
2450 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to
2451 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding
2452 behavior, you can set the variable
2453 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This
2454 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with
2455 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config
2456 Basics}).
2457
2458 @item
2459 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is
2460 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's
2461 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's
2462 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than
2463 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you
2464 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling
2465 @code{c-set-offset} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set
2466 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then
2467 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of
2468 @code{c-offsets-alist}.
2469
2470 @item
2471 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a
2472 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove
2473 them, so any global settings you put on it are always
2474 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value
2475 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function
2476 or a list of functions.
2477
2478 @item
2479 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special
2480 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized.
2481 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details.
2482 @end itemize
2483
2484 The style variables are:@*
2485 @code{c-indent-comment-alist},
2486 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation
2487 Commands});@*
2488 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@*
2489 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp}
2490 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@*
2491 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@*
2492 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@*
2493 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and
2494 Commas});@*
2495 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@*
2496 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@*
2497 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@*
2498 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@*
2499 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation}
2500 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@*
2501 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column}
2502 (@pxref{Custom Macros}).
2503
2504 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2505 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics
2506 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2507 @section Styles
2508 @cindex styles
2509 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2510
2511 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many
2512 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets
2513 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct
2514 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line.
2515
2516 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined
2517 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a
2518 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly,
2519 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style.
2520 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as
2521 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For
2522 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical
2523 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name
2524 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or
2525 existing code using these styles.
2526
2527 As an alternative to writing a style definition yourself, you can have
2528 @ccmode{} @dfn{guess} (at least part of) your style by looking at an
2529 already formatted piece of your code, @ref{Guessing the Style}.
2530
2531 @menu
2532 * Built-in Styles::
2533 * Choosing a Style::
2534 * Adding Styles::
2535 * Guessing the Style::
2536 * File Styles::
2537 @end menu
2538
2539 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2540 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles
2541 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2542 @subsection Built-in Styles
2543 @cindex styles, built-in
2544 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2545
2546 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just
2547 what you're looking for. These are:
2548
2549 @table @code
2550 @item gnu
2551 @cindex GNU style
2552 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation
2553 for C code in GNU programs.
2554
2555 @item k&r
2556 @cindex K&R style
2557 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code.
2558
2559 @item bsd
2560 @cindex BSD style
2561 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman.
2562
2563 @item whitesmith
2564 @cindex Whitesmith style
2565 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early
2566 commercial C compiler.
2567
2568 @item stroustrup
2569 @cindex Stroustrup style
2570 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code.
2571
2572 @item ellemtel
2573 @cindex Ellemtel style
2574 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules
2575 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson,
2576 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at
2577 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other
2578 places.}.
2579 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM).
2580
2581 @item linux
2582 @cindex Linux style
2583 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel).
2584
2585 @item python
2586 @cindex Python style
2587 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a
2588 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface.
2589 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}.
2590
2591 @item java
2592 @cindex Java style
2593 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default
2594 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2595 @code{java-mode}.
2596
2597 @item awk
2598 @cindex AWK style
2599 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for
2600 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter
2601 @code{awk-mode}.
2602
2603 @item user
2604 @cindex User style
2605 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory
2606 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations
2607 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing
2608 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your
2609 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates
2610 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it
2611 afterwards.
2612 @end table
2613
2614
2615 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2616 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles
2617 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2618 @subsection Choosing a Style
2619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2620
2621 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from
2622 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu},
2623 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}.
2624
2625 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization
2626 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the
2627 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will
2628 override the one that the style system would have given the variable.
2629
2630 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .}
2631 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable
2632 list, @ref{File Styles}.
2633
2634 @defopt c-default-style
2635 @vindex default-style (c-)
2636 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new
2637 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list
2638 of major mode symbols to style names:
2639
2640 @enumerate
2641 @item
2642 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style
2643 name. This style is then used for all modes.
2644
2645 @item
2646 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language
2647 is looked up to find a style name string.
2648
2649 @item
2650 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode
2651 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is
2652 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used.
2653
2654 @item
2655 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used.
2656 @end enumerate
2657
2658 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed
2659 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override
2660 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your
2661 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}.
2662
2663 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode
2664 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}.
2665 @end defopt
2666
2667 @defvar c-indentation-style
2668 @vindex indentation-style (c-)
2669 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a
2670 string.
2671 @end defvar
2672
2673 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2674 @node Adding Styles, Guessing the Style, Choosing a Style, Styles
2675 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2676 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles
2677 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2678
2679 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to
2680 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing
2681 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the
2682 following format; the list can then be passed as an argument to the
2683 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style
2684 definition in @ref{Sample Init File}.
2685
2686 @cindex style definition
2687 @c @defvr {List} style definition
2688 @table @asis
2689 @item Structure of a Style Definition List
2690 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}])
2691
2692 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the
2693 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most
2694 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If
2695 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table
2696 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in
2697 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually
2698 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The
2699 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}.
2700
2701 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a
2702 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later
2703 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value
2704 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of
2705 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system
2706 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a
2707 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the
2708 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style
2709 system.
2710 @c @end defvr
2711
2712 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list:
2713
2714 @table @code
2715 @item c-offsets-alist
2716 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form
2717
2718 @example
2719 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}})
2720 @end example
2721
2722 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to
2723 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol
2724 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style.
2725
2726 @item c-special-indent-hook
2727 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using
2728 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value
2729 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}.
2730 @end table
2731 @end table
2732
2733 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you
2734 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{}
2735 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose.
2736
2737 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p
2738 @findex add-style (c-)
2739 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string.
2740 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described
2741 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then
2742 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is
2743 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.)
2744 Otherwise, a new style is added.
2745
2746 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is
2747 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is
2748 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release.
2749 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead.
2750
2751 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new
2752 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample Init File}.
2753 @end defun
2754
2755 @defvar c-style-alist
2756 @vindex style-alist (c-)
2757 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It
2758 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead.
2759 @end defvar
2760
2761 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2762 @node Guessing the Style, File Styles, Adding Styles, Styles
2763 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2764 @subsection Guessing the Style
2765 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2766
2767 Instead of specifying a style, you can get @ccmode{} to @dfn{guess}
2768 your style by examining an already formatted code buffer. @ccmode{}
2769 then determines the ''most frequent'' offset (@pxref{c-offsets-alist})
2770 for each of the syntactic symbols (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})
2771 encountered in the buffer, and the ''most frequent'' value of
2772 c-basic-offset (@pxref{Customizing Indentation}), then merges the
2773 current style with these ''guesses'' to form a new style. This
2774 combined style is known as the @dfn{guessed style}.
2775
2776 To do this, call @code{c-guess} (or one of the other 5 guessing
2777 commands) on your sample buffer. The analysis of your code may take
2778 some time.
2779
2780 You can then set the guessed style in any @ccmode{} buffer with
2781 @code{c-guess-install}. You can display the style with
2782 @code{c-guess-view}, and preserve it by copying it into your
2783 @file{.emacs} for future use, preferably after editing it.
2784
2785 @table @asis
2786 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-no-install}
2787 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer-no-install}
2788 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region-no-install}
2789 @findex c-guess-no-install
2790 @findex c-guess-buffer-no-install
2791 @findex c-guess-region-no-install
2792 @findex guess-no-install (c-)
2793 @findex guess-buffer-no-install (c-)
2794 @findex guess-region-no-install (c-)
2795 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer and guess the
2796 style from it.
2797
2798 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2799 (@code{c-guess-region-no-install}), the entire buffer
2800 (@code{c-guess-buffer-no-install}), or the first
2801 @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess-no-install}).
2802
2803 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2804 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2805 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2806 @end table
2807
2808 @table @asis
2809 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess}
2810 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-buffer}
2811 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-guess-region}
2812 @findex c-guess
2813 @findex c-guess-buffer
2814 @findex c-guess-region
2815 @findex guess (c-)
2816 @findex guess-buffer (c-)
2817 @findex guess-region (c-)
2818 These commands analyze a part of the current buffer, guess the style
2819 from it, then install the guessed style on the buffer. The guessed
2820 style is given a name based on the buffer's absolute file name, and
2821 you can then set this style on any @ccmode{} buffer with @kbd{C-c .}.
2822
2823 The part of the buffer examined is either the region
2824 (@code{c-guess-region}), the entire buffer (@code{c-guess-buffer}), or
2825 the first @code{c-guess-region-max} bytes (@code{c-guess}).
2826
2827 Each of these commands can be given an optional prefix argument. This
2828 instructs @ccmode{} to combine the new guesses with the current
2829 guesses before forming the guessed style.
2830 @end table
2831
2832 @defopt c-guess-region-max
2833 @vindex guess-region-max (c-)
2834 This variable, default 50000, is the size in bytes of the buffer
2835 portion examined by c-guess and c-guess-no-install. If set to
2836 @code{nil}, the entire buffer is examined.
2837 @end defopt
2838
2839 @defopt c-guess-offset-threshold
2840 @vindex guess-offset-threshold (c-)
2841 This variable, default 10, is the maximum offset, either outwards or
2842 inwards, which will be taken into account by the analysis process.
2843 Any offset bigger than this will be ignored. For no limit, set this
2844 variable to a large number.
2845 @end defopt
2846
2847 @table @asis
2848 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-install}
2849 @findex c-guess-install
2850 @findex guess-install (c-)
2851
2852 Set the current buffer's style to the guessed style. This prompts you
2853 to enter an optional new style name to give to the guessed style. By
2854 default, this name is based on the buffer's absolute file name. You
2855 can then use this style like any other.
2856
2857 @item @kbd{M-x c-guess-view}
2858 @findex c-guess-view
2859 @findex guess-view (c-)
2860 Display the most recently guessed style in a temporary buffer. This
2861 display is in the form of a @code{c-add-style} form (@pxref{Adding
2862 Styles}) which can be easily copied to your @file{.emacs}. You will
2863 probably want to edit it first.
2864
2865 The display of the guessed style contains these elements:
2866
2867 @table @asis
2868 @item Placeholder Name
2869 You should replace this with a style name of your own.
2870 @item Parent Style
2871 The style current when the guessing began, from which the guessed
2872 style inherits (@pxref{Config Basics}) the settings which weren't
2873 guessed.
2874 @item Guessed Offsets
2875 These are the core result of the guessing process. Each of them is
2876 marked by a comment.
2877 @item Inherited Offsets
2878 These are syntactic offsets which have been taken over from the parent
2879 style. To avoid possible future conflicts, you should remove either
2880 these offsets or the parent style name.
2881 @end table
2882 @end table
2883
2884 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2885 @node File Styles, , Guessing the Style, Styles
2886 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2887 @subsection File Styles
2888 @cindex styles, file local
2889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2890
2891 @cindex file local variables
2892
2893 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a
2894 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end
2895 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files,@emacsman{},
2896 @emacsmantitle{}}).
2897
2898 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in
2899 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by
2900 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list.
2901 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style
2902 on a per-file basis:
2903
2904 @defvar c-file-style
2905 @vindex file-style (c-)
2906 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list.
2907 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set
2908 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}.
2909 @end defvar
2910
2911 @defvar c-file-offsets
2912 @vindex file-offsets (c-)
2913 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list
2914 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you
2915 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2916 using @code{c-set-offset}.
2917 @end defvar
2918
2919 Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2920 before file offset settings
2921 (i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2922 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2923 made local to that buffer, even if
2924 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
2925 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to
2926 notice this effect.}.
2927
2928 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that
2929 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your
2930 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable
2931 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or
2932 @code{c-file-offsets}.
2933 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2934 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top
2935 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2936 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking
2937 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2938
2939 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
2940 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does
2941 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning
2942 relevant variables as necessary.
2943
2944 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp
2945 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2946 @cindex comment line prefix
2947 @vindex comment-start
2948 @vindex comment-end
2949 @vindex comment-start-skip
2950 @vindex paragraph-start
2951 @vindex paragraph-separate
2952 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix
2953 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
2954 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp
2955 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp
2956 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal
2957 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard
2958 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end},
2959 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start},
2960 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix},
2961 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and
2962 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them
2963 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix.
2964
2965 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp
2966 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-)
2967 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the
2968 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts
2969 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line
2970 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different
2971 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is
2972 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it
2973 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead.
2974
2975 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{}
2976 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start
2977 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is
2978 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like
2979
2980 @example
2981 // blah blah
2982 @end example
2983
2984 @noindent
2985 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and
2986 subsequent lines of C style block comments like
2987
2988 @example
2989 @group
2990 /*
2991 * blah blah
2992 */
2993 @end group
2994 @end example
2995
2996 @noindent
2997 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
2998 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
2999 (i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3000 block comments.
3001
3002 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
3003 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-)
3004 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of
3005 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at
3006 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it
3007 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command
3008 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other
3009 variables. That's also the case if you modify
3010 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will
3011 already have set up these variables before calling the hook.
3012 @end defopt
3013
3014 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt
3015 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3016
3017 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode
3018 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode
3019 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3020 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3021 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3022 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3023 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3024 margins of the texts kept intact:
3025
3026 @example
3027 @group
3028 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming
3029 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E.
3030 * Knuth,
3031 *
3032 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only
3033 * proved it correct, not tried it.
3034 */
3035 @end group
3036 @end example
3037
3038 @findex c-setup-filladapt
3039 @findex setup-filladapt (c-)
3040 @findex filladapt-mode
3041 @vindex filladapt-mode
3042 @cindex Filladapt mode
3043 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle
3044 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from
3045 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however
3046 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when
3047 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does
3048 by default). A patch for that is available from
3049 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.},
3050 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3051 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3052 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3053 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3054 something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3055
3056 @example
3057 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
3058 (c-setup-filladapt)
3059 (filladapt-mode 1))
3060 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
3061 @end example
3062
3063 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix
3064 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-)
3065 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars
3066 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-)
3067 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a
3068 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one
3069 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like,
3070 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style
3071 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called
3072 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure,
3073 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used
3074 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3075 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of
3076 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3077 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3078 splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3079 e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3080
3081 @example
3082 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
3083 @end example
3084
3085 @noindent
3086 break into
3087
3088 @example
3089 @group
3090 /* Got O(n^2) here, which
3091 * is a Bad Thing. */
3092 @end group
3093 @end example
3094
3095 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading
3096 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the
3097 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to
3098 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It
3099 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of
3100 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3101 @end defopt
3102
3103 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3104 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3105 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3106 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3107 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3108 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3109 never should occur:
3110
3111 @table @code
3112 @item string
3113 Inside a string or character literal.
3114 @item c
3115 Inside a C style block comment.
3116 @item c++
3117 Inside a C++ style line comment.
3118 @item cpp
3119 Inside a preprocessor directive.
3120 @item code
3121 Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3122 @end table
3123
3124 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
3125 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated,
3126 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often
3127 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor
3128 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline
3129 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would
3130 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally
3131 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last
3132 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor
3133 results in the current implementation.
3134 @end defopt
3135
3136 @vindex comment-multi-line
3137 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto
3138 Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the
3139 indentation and
3140 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and
3141 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same
3142 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for
3143 comments.
3144
3145 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3146 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3147 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3148 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3149 (e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3150 inconsistent behavior.
3151
3152 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3153 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top
3154 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3155 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines
3156 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3157
3158 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically
3159 different ways, depending on the character just typed:
3160
3161 @table @asis
3162 @item Braces and Colons
3163 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon
3164 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in
3165 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines: this is any
3166 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist
3167 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace,
3168 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and
3169 @ref{Hanging Colons}.
3170
3171 @item Semicolons and Commas
3172 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of
3173 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly
3174 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}.
3175 @end table
3176
3177 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging}
3178 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character
3179 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when
3180 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a
3181 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in:
3182
3183 @example
3184 @group
3185 while (i < MAX) @{
3186 total += entry[i];
3187 entry [i++] = 0;
3188 @}
3189 @end group
3190 @end example
3191
3192 @noindent
3193 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of
3194 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing
3195 brace.
3196
3197 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{}
3198 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific
3199 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}.
3200
3201 @menu
3202 * Hanging Braces::
3203 * Hanging Colons::
3204 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas::
3205 @end menu
3206
3207
3208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3209 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines
3210 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3211 @section Hanging Braces
3212 @cindex hanging braces
3213 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3214
3215 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around,
3216 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its
3217 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how
3218 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given
3219 in @ref{Style Variables}.
3220
3221 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following
3222 @samp{@{}:
3223
3224 @example
3225 if (foo < 17) @{
3226 @end example
3227
3228 @noindent
3229 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type
3230 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its
3231 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if
3232 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you
3233 something like:
3234
3235 @example
3236 ((substatement-open 1061))
3237 @end example
3238
3239 @noindent
3240 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))}
3241 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}.
3242
3243 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol,
3244 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}:
3245
3246 @example
3247 (brace-entry-open)
3248 @end example
3249
3250 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist},
3251 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a
3252 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a
3253 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this
3254 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace.
3255
3256 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist
3257 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3258
3259 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to
3260 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association
3261 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the
3262 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list,
3263 or a function.
3264
3265 @table @asis
3266 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3267 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are
3268 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont},
3269 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the
3270 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3271 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for
3272 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't
3273 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get
3274 ignored.
3275
3276 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special
3277 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that
3278 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The
3279 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of
3280 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in
3281 normal indentation analysis.}.
3282
3283 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})},
3284 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace
3285 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation
3286 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on
3287 these constructs.
3288
3289 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list or function
3290 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association
3291 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a
3292 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use
3293 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}.
3294
3295 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's
3296 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and
3297 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in
3298 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains
3299 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side
3300 of the line, as in:
3301
3302 @example
3303 // here, open braces always 'hang'
3304 void spam( int i ) @{
3305 if( i == 7 ) @{
3306 dosomething(i);
3307 @}
3308 @}
3309 @end example
3310
3311 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces
3312 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in
3313 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines
3314 are added neither before nor after the brace.
3315 @end table
3316
3317 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from
3318 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an
3319 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so
3320 that braces by default end up on their own line.
3321
3322 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is:
3323
3324 @example
3325 ((brace-list-open)
3326 (brace-entry-open)
3327 (statement-cont)
3328 (substatement-open after)
3329 (block-close . c-snug-do-while)
3330 (extern-lang-open after)
3331 (namespace-open after)
3332 (module-open after)
3333 (composition-open after)
3334 (inexpr-class-open after)
3335 (inexpr-class-close before))
3336 @end example
3337
3338 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open},
3339 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists
3340 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables
3341 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All
3342 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces
3343 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow
3344 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open},
3345 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang
3346 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line.
3347 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't
3348 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the
3349 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as
3350 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by
3351 themselves.
3352 @end defopt
3353
3354 @menu
3355 * Custom Braces::
3356 @end menu
3357
3358 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3359 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces
3360 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3361 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging
3362 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3363
3364 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist
3365 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-)
3366 @cindex action functions
3367 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize
3368 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember
3369 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of
3370 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}).
3371 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by
3372 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3373 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the
3374 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it.
3375
3376 @cindex customization, brace hanging
3377 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3378 for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3379 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3380 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3381 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3382 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3383 of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3384
3385 @defvar c-syntactic-context
3386 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
3387 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action}
3388 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list.
3389 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever
3390 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt
3391 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}.
3392
3393 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances:
3394 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function
3395 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a
3396 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a
3397 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
3398 @end defvar
3399
3400 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically
3401 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while''
3402 constructs:
3403
3404 @example
3405 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string )
3406 @{
3407 int i=0;
3408 do @{
3409 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] );
3410 i++;
3411 @} while( i < count );
3412 @}
3413 @end example
3414
3415 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the
3416 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the
3417 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate
3418 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the
3419 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we
3420 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function
3421 @code{c-snug-do-while}:
3422
3423 @example
3424 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos)
3425 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements."
3426 (save-excursion
3427 (let (langelem)
3428 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close)
3429 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context))
3430 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem))
3431 (if (= (following-char) ?@{)
3432 (forward-sexp -1))
3433 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]")))
3434 '(before)
3435 '(before after)))))
3436 @end example
3437
3438 @findex c-snug-do-while
3439 @findex snug-do-while (c-)
3440 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while''
3441 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating
3442 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it.
3443 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so
3444 that the brace appears on a line by itself.
3445
3446 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3447 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines
3448 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3449 @section Hanging Colons
3450 @cindex hanging colons
3451 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3452
3453 @cindex customization, colon hanging
3454 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist
3455 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3456
3457 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}),
3458 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable
3459 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist}: when a colon is typed, @ccmode
3460 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist
3461 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines
3462 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a
3463 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the
3464 newly typed colon.
3465
3466 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist
3467 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-)
3468
3469 @table @asis
3470 @item The Key: the syntactic symbol
3471 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list
3472 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label},
3473 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic
3474 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored.
3475
3476 @item The associated value: the ``ACTION'' list
3477 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the
3478 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in
3479 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not
3480 supported; there doesn't seem to be any need for them.
3481 @end table
3482 @end defopt
3483
3484 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these
3485 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after
3486 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in
3487 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details.
3488
3489 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3490 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines
3491 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3492 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas
3493 @cindex hanging semicolons
3494 @cindex hanging commas
3495 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines
3496 @cindex customization, comma newlines
3497 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3498
3499 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria
3500 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-)
3501 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when
3502 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order
3503 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just
3504 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve
3505 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the
3506 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context
3507 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{}
3508 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines
3509 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so.
3510 They should return one of the following values:
3511
3512 @table @code
3513 @item t
3514 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no
3515 more functions from the list are to be called.
3516 @item stop
3517 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to
3518 be inserted.
3519 @item nil
3520 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is
3521 to be called.
3522 @end table
3523
3524 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon
3525 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a
3526 determination being made, then no newline is added.
3527
3528 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the
3529 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function,
3530 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all
3531 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements.
3532 @end defopt
3533
3534 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks
3535 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-)
3536 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It
3537 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a
3538 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To
3539 use, add this function to the front of the
3540 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list.
3541
3542 @example
3543 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks ()
3544 (save-excursion
3545 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;)
3546 (zerop (forward-line 1))
3547 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$")))
3548 'stop
3549 nil)))
3550 @end example
3551 @end defun
3552
3553 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist
3554 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-)
3555 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners
3556 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-)
3557 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents
3558 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for}
3559 statements. In addition to
3560 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above,
3561 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3562 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3563 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3564 (e.g., in C++ or Java).
3565 @end defun
3566
3567
3568 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3569 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top
3570 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3571 @chapter Clean-ups
3572 @cindex clean-ups
3573 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3574
3575 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3576 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3577 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3578 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3579
3580 @example
3581 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
3582 @end example
3583
3584 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3585 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3586 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3587 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3588
3589 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
3590 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will
3591 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there
3592 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components
3593 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the
3594 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}).
3595
3596 @defopt c-cleanup-list
3597 @vindex cleanup-list (c-)
3598 @cindex literal
3599
3600 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable
3601 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By
3602 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct,
3603 which is necessary for proper C++ support.
3604 @end defopt
3605
3606 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and
3607 auto-newline minor modes are enabled:
3608
3609 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a
3610 @c bit too much in dvi output.
3611 @table @code
3612 @item brace-else-brace
3613 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on
3614 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the
3615 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this:
3616
3617 @example
3618 @group
3619 void spam(int i)
3620 @{
3621 if( i==7 ) @{
3622 dosomething();
3623 @}
3624 else
3625 @{
3626 @end group
3627 @end example
3628
3629 @noindent
3630 appears like this after the last open brace is typed:
3631
3632 @example
3633 @group
3634 void spam(int i)
3635 @{
3636 if( i==7 ) @{
3637 dosomething();
3638 @} else @{
3639 @end group
3640 @end example
3641
3642 @item brace-elseif-brace
3643 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up
3644 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example:
3645
3646 @example
3647 @group
3648 void spam(int i)
3649 @{
3650 if( i==7 ) @{
3651 dosomething();
3652 @}
3653 else if( i==3 )
3654 @{
3655 @end group
3656 @end example
3657
3658 @noindent
3659 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed:
3660
3661 @example
3662 @group
3663 void spam(int i)
3664 @{
3665 if( i==7 ) @{
3666 dosomething();
3667 @} else if(
3668 @end group
3669 @end example
3670
3671 @noindent
3672 and like this after the last open brace is typed:
3673
3674 @example
3675 @group
3676 void spam(int i)
3677 @{
3678 if( i==7 ) @{
3679 dosomething();
3680 @} else if( i==3 ) @{
3681 @end group
3682 @end example
3683
3684 @item brace-catch-brace
3685 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch
3686 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode.
3687
3688 @item empty-defun-braces
3689 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that
3690 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed.
3691 Thus the following:
3692
3693 @example
3694 @group
3695 class Spam
3696 @{
3697 @}
3698 @end group
3699 @end example
3700
3701 @noindent
3702 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed:
3703
3704 @example
3705 @group
3706 class Spam
3707 @{@}
3708 @end group
3709 @end example
3710
3711 @item defun-close-semi
3712 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class
3713 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the
3714 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following:
3715
3716 @example
3717 @group
3718 class Spam
3719 @{
3720 ...
3721 @}
3722 ;
3723 @end group
3724 @end example
3725
3726 @noindent
3727 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed:
3728
3729 @example
3730 @group
3731 class Spam
3732 @{
3733 ...
3734 @};
3735 @end group
3736 @end example
3737
3738 @item list-close-comma
3739 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers.
3740 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma
3741 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in
3742 @code{defun-close-semi}.
3743
3744 @item scope-operator
3745 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split
3746 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce
3747 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not
3748 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers
3749 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is
3750 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the
3751 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code.
3752
3753 @item one-liner-defun
3754 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing
3755 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when
3756 the closing brace is typed. If the variable
3757 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the
3758 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable.
3759
3760 For example, consider this AWK code:
3761
3762 @example
3763 @group
3764 BEGIN @{
3765 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator
3766 @}
3767 @end group
3768 @end example
3769
3770 @noindent
3771 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed:
3772
3773 @example
3774 @group
3775 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator
3776 @end group
3777 @end example
3778
3779 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length
3780 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-)
3781 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up
3782 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire
3783 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its
3784 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit
3785 applies.
3786 @end defopt
3787 @end table
3788
3789 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on
3790 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or
3791 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3792
3793 @table @code
3794 @item space-before-funcall
3795 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3796 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3797 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3798 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3799 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3800 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
3801 functions.
3802
3803 @item compact-empty-funcall
3804 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3805 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3806 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3807 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3808 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3809 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3810 closing parenthesis is typed.
3811
3812 @item comment-close-slash
3813 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3814 at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3815 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3816 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3817 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
3818 @end table
3819
3820
3821 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3822 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top
3823 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3824 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics
3825 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3826
3827 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code.
3828 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that
3829 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding
3830 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}.
3831
3832 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and
3833 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents
3834 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps:
3835
3836 @enumerate
3837 @item
3838 @cindex syntactic symbol
3839 @cindex anchor position
3840 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the
3841 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor
3842 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent
3843 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of
3844 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic
3845 Analysis}.
3846 @item
3847 @cindex offsets
3848 @cindex indentation offset specifications
3849 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the
3850 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means
3851 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{}
3852 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the
3853 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are
3854 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
3855 @end enumerate
3856
3857 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation
3858 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable
3859 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set
3860 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}).
3861
3862 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation
3863 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-)
3864 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation
3865 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's
3866 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the
3867 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the
3868 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style
3869 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any
3870 of the variables associated with indentation, not even
3871 @code{c-special-indent-hook}.
3872 @end defopt
3873
3874 @menu
3875 * Syntactic Analysis::
3876 * Syntactic Symbols::
3877 * Indentation Calculation::
3878 @end menu
3879
3880
3881 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3882 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics
3883 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3884 @section Syntactic Analysis
3885 @cindex syntactic analysis
3886 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
3887
3888 @cindex syntactic element
3889 @cindex syntactic context
3890 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to
3891 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the
3892 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic
3893 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In
3894 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the
3895 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position.
3896 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function
3897 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a
3898 brief and typical example:
3899
3900 @example
3901 ((defun-block-intro 1959))
3902 @end example
3903
3904 @cindex syntactic symbol
3905 @noindent
3906 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3907 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3908 recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3909 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3910 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3911 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
3912 with the recognized construct; there might be zero or more.
3913
3914 @cindex anchor position
3915 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some
3916 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the
3917 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the
3918 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in
3919 the syntactic element list then it's either @code{nil} or that anchor position.
3920
3921 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing
3922 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples
3923 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}:
3924
3925 @example
3926 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
3927 2: @{
3928 3: int tmp = a;
3929 4: a = b;
3930 5: b = tmp;
3931 6: @}
3932 @end example
3933
3934 @noindent
3935 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to
3936 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line:
3937
3938 @table @asis
3939 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information})
3940 @kindex C-c C-s
3941 @findex c-show-syntactic-information
3942 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-)
3943 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and
3944 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor
3945 position(s).
3946 @end table
3947
3948 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3949 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3950 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3951 line.}:
3952
3953 @example
3954 ((statement 35))
3955 @end example
3956
3957 @noindent
3958 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This
3959 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to
3960 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move
3961 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see:
3962
3963 @example
3964 ((defun-block-intro 29))
3965 @end example
3966
3967 @noindent
3968 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top
3969 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29,
3970 which is the brace just after the function header.
3971
3972 Here's another example:
3973
3974 @example
3975 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
3976 2: @{
3977 3: if( doit )
3978 4: @{
3979 5: return( val + incr );
3980 6: @}
3981 7: return( val );
3982 8: @}
3983 @end example
3984
3985 @noindent
3986 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us:
3987
3988 @example
3989 ((substatement-open 46))
3990 @end example
3991
3992 @cindex substatement
3993 @cindex substatement block
3994 @noindent
3995 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement
3996 block.@footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a
3997 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while},
3998 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement
3999 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.}
4000
4001 @cindex comment-only line
4002 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic
4003 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of
4004 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}:
4005
4006 @example
4007 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables )
4008 2: @{
4009 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list
4010 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i )
4011 5: @{
4012 6: drawables[i].draw();
4013 7: @}
4014 8: @}
4015 @end example
4016
4017 @noindent
4018 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives:
4019
4020 @example
4021 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46))
4022 @end example
4023
4024 @noindent
4025 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic
4026 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no
4027 anchor position.
4028
4029
4030 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4031 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics
4032 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4033 @section Syntactic Symbols
4034 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4035
4036 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list
4037 @vindex c-offsets-alist
4038 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
4039 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear
4040 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief
4041 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis})
4042 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses
4043 them.
4044
4045 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of
4046 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the
4047 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor
4048 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not}
4049 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent
4050 line---this highlights the anchor position.
4051
4052 @ssindex -open symbols
4053 @ssindex -close symbols
4054 @ssindex -block-intro symbols
4055 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general
4056 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace,
4057 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or
4058 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block
4059 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}.
4060
4061 @ssindex -intro symbols
4062 @ssindex -cont symbols
4063 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually
4064 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the
4065 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these
4066 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont}
4067 respectively.
4068
4069 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some
4070 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code
4071 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}.
4072
4073 @table @code
4074 @item string
4075 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4076 @item c
4077 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4078 @item defun-open
4079 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4080 Symbols}.
4081 @item defun-close
4082 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function
4083 Symbols}.
4084 @item defun-block-intro
4085 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4086 @item class-open
4087 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4088 @item class-close
4089 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4090 @item inline-open
4091 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4092 @item inline-close
4093 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4094 @item func-decl-cont
4095 The region between a function definition's argument list and the
4096 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C,
4097 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region,
4098 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things
4099 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not
4100 @c go somewhere better?}
4101 @item knr-argdecl-intro
4102 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4103 @item knr-argdecl
4104 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}.
4105 @item topmost-intro
4106 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4107 @item topmost-intro-cont
4108 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts
4109 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and
4110 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4111 @item annotation-top-cont
4112 Topmost definition continuation lines where all previous items are
4113 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4114 @item member-init-intro
4115 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4116 @item member-init-cont
4117 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4118 @item inher-intro
4119 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4120 @item inher-cont
4121 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4122 @item block-open
4123 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4124 @item block-close
4125 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4126 @item brace-list-open
4127 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4128 @item brace-list-close
4129 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4130 @item brace-list-intro
4131 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4132 @item brace-list-entry
4133 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List
4134 Symbols}.
4135 @item brace-entry-open
4136 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins
4137 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}.
4138 @item statement
4139 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4140 @item statement-cont
4141 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}.
4142 @item annotation-var-cont
4143 A continuation of a statement where all previous items are
4144 annotations. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4145 @item statement-block-intro
4146 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4147 Symbols}.
4148 @item statement-case-intro
4149 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4150 @item statement-case-open
4151 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch
4152 Statement Symbols}.
4153 @item substatement
4154 The first line after a conditional or loop construct.
4155 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4156 @item substatement-open
4157 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct
4158 Symbols}.
4159 @item substatement-label
4160 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label.
4161 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4162 @item case-label
4163 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}.
4164 @item access-label
4165 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4166 @item label
4167 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4168 @item do-while-closure
4169 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct.
4170 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4171 @item else-clause
4172 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct.
4173 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}.
4174 @item catch-clause
4175 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a
4176 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct
4177 Symbols}.
4178 @item comment-intro
4179 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4180 @item arglist-intro
4181 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4182 @item arglist-cont
4183 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same
4184 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4185 @item arglist-cont-nonempty
4186 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on
4187 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4188 @item arglist-close
4189 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}.
4190 @item stream-op
4191 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal
4192 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?}
4193 @item inclass
4194 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4195 @item cpp-macro
4196 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}.
4197 @item cpp-define-intro
4198 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if
4199 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro
4200 Symbols}.
4201 @item cpp-macro-cont
4202 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if
4203 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}.
4204 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}.
4205 @item friend
4206 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4207 @item objc-method-intro
4208 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4209 Method Symbols}.
4210 @item objc-method-args-cont
4211 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C
4212 Method Symbols}.
4213 @item objc-method-call-cont
4214 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4215 Symbols}.
4216 @item extern-lang-open
4217 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4218 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4219 @item extern-lang-close
4220 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
4221 Symbols}.
4222 @item inextern-lang
4223 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside
4224 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4225 @item namespace-open
4226 @itemx namespace-close
4227 @itemx innamespace
4228 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but
4229 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4230 @item module-open
4231 @itemx module-close
4232 @itemx inmodule
4233 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks.
4234 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4235 @item composition-open
4236 @itemx composition-close
4237 @itemx incomposition
4238 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4239 @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4240 @item template-args-cont
4241 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4242 @item inlambda
4243 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4244 (i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4245 Block Symbols}.
4246 @item lambda-intro-cont
4247 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4248 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4249 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4250 @item inexpr-statement
4251 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension
4252 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that
4253 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block
4254 Symbols}.
4255 @item inexpr-class
4256 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous
4257 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in
4258 Java. @ref{Java Symbols}.
4259 @end table
4260
4261 @menu
4262 * Function Symbols::
4263 * Class Symbols::
4264 * Conditional Construct Symbols::
4265 * Switch Statement Symbols::
4266 * Brace List Symbols::
4267 * External Scope Symbols::
4268 * Paren List Symbols::
4269 * Literal Symbols::
4270 * Multiline Macro Symbols::
4271 * Objective-C Method Symbols::
4272 * Java Symbols::
4273 * Statement Block Symbols::
4274 * K&R Symbols::
4275 @end menu
4276
4277 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4278 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4279 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4280 @subsection Function Symbols
4281 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4282
4283 This example shows a typical function declaration.
4284
4285 @example
4286 1: void
4287 2: swap( int& a, int& b )
4288 3: @{
4289 4: int tmp = a;
4290 5: a = b;
4291 6: b = tmp;
4292 7: int ignored =
4293 8: a + b;
4294 9: @}
4295 @end example
4296
4297 @ssindex topmost-intro
4298 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont
4299 @ssindex defun-open
4300 @ssindex defun-close
4301 @ssindex defun-block-intro
4302 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that
4303 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the
4304 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4305 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is
4306 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4307 corresponding
4308 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4309 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4310 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4311 top-level function definition.
4312
4313 @ssindex statement
4314 @ssindex statement-cont
4315 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there
4316 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given
4317 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun
4318 on the previous line.
4319
4320 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4321 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4322 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4323 @subsection Class related Symbols
4324 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4325
4326 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols:
4327
4328 @example
4329 1: class Bass
4330 2: : public Guitar,
4331 3: public Amplifiable
4332 4: @{
4333 5: public:
4334 6: Bass()
4335 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4336 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4337 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4338 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4339 11: @{
4340 12: eString.tune( 'E' );
4341 13: aString.tune( 'A' );
4342 14: dString.tune( 'D' );
4343 15: gString.tune( 'G' );
4344 16: @}
4345 17: friend class Luthier;
4346 18: @};
4347 @end example
4348
4349 @ssindex class-open
4350 @ssindex class-close
4351 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax.
4352 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is
4353 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes,
4354 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4355 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4356 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4357 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4358 for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4359 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4360 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4361 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
4362
4363 @ssindex inher-intro
4364 @ssindex inher-cont
4365 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned
4366 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the
4367 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax.
4368
4369 @ssindex access-label
4370 @ssindex inclass
4371 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis:
4372
4373 @example
4374 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58))
4375 @end example
4376
4377 @noindent
4378 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as
4379 this is a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However,
4380 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class
4381 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The
4382 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}.
4383 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro}
4384 syntax:
4385
4386 @example
4387 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60))
4388 @end example
4389
4390 @ssindex member-init-intro
4391 @ssindex member-init-cont
4392 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given
4393 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is
4394 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a
4395 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned
4396 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization
4397 list started on line 7.
4398
4399 @cindex in-class inline methods
4400 @ssindex inline-open
4401 @ssindex inline-close
4402 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated:
4403
4404 @example
4405 ((inclass 58) (inline-open))
4406 @end example
4407
4408 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and
4409 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method
4410 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an
4411 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class
4412 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined.
4413 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared
4414 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the
4415 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared
4416 before the method name, as in:
4417
4418 @example
4419 1: class Bass
4420 2: : public Guitar,
4421 3: public Amplifiable
4422 4: @{
4423 5: public:
4424 6: Bass();
4425 7: @};
4426 8:
4427 9: inline
4428 10: Bass::Bass()
4429 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )),
4430 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )),
4431 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )),
4432 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 ))
4433 15: @{
4434 16: eString.tune( 'E' );
4435 17: aString.tune( 'A' );
4436 18: dString.tune( 'D' );
4437 19: gString.tune( 'G' );
4438 20: @}
4439 @end example
4440
4441 @ssindex friend
4442 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close}
4443 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines
4444 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is
4445 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three
4446 elements:
4447
4448 @example
4449 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend))
4450 @end example
4451
4452 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are
4453 modifiers that do not have anchor positions.
4454
4455 @ssindex template-args-cont
4456 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol:
4457
4458 @example
4459 1: ThingManager <int,
4460 2: Framework::Callback *,
4461 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks;
4462 @end example
4463
4464 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3
4465 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines.
4466
4467 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4468 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4469 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4470 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols
4471 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4472
4473 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is
4474 assigned to various conditional constructs:
4475
4476 @example
4477 1: void spam( int index )
4478 2: @{
4479 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ )
4480 4: @{
4481 5: if( i == 10 )
4482 6: do_something_special();
4483 7: else
4484 8: silly_label:
4485 9: do_something( i );
4486 10: @}
4487 11: do @{
4488 12: another_thing( i-- );
4489 13: @}
4490 14: while( i > 0 );
4491 15: @}
4492 @end example
4493
4494 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed.
4495
4496 @ssindex substatement-open
4497 @ssindex statement-block-intro
4498 @ssindex block-close
4499 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It
4500 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is
4501 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned
4502 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace
4503 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the
4504 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for
4505 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal
4506 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way.
4507
4508 @ssindex substatement
4509 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they
4510 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax
4511 instead of @code{substatement-open}.
4512
4513 @ssindex substatement-label
4514 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax.
4515 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and
4516 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you
4517 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels.
4518
4519 @ssindex else-clause
4520 @ssindex catch-clause
4521 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on
4522 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is
4523 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch}
4524 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that
4525 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with
4526 @code{catch-clause}.
4527
4528 @ssindex do-while-closure
4529 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do}
4530 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it
4531 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on
4532 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have
4533 @code{block-close} syntax.
4534
4535 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4536 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4537 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4538 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols
4539 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4540
4541 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an
4542 example:
4543
4544 @example
4545 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i )
4546 2: @{
4547 3: switch( i ) @{
4548 4: case Ham:
4549 5: be_a_pig();
4550 6: break;
4551 7: case Salt:
4552 8: drink_some_water();
4553 9: break;
4554 10: default:
4555 11: @{
4556 12: what_is_it();
4557 13: break;
4558 14: @}
4559 15: @}
4560 14: @}
4561 @end example
4562
4563 @ssindex case-label
4564 @ssindex statement-case-intro
4565 @ssindex statement-case-open
4566 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax,
4567 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11
4568 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a
4569 block; it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax.
4570
4571 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4572 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4573 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4574 @subsection Brace List Symbols
4575 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4576
4577 @cindex brace lists
4578 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize
4579 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an
4580 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically
4581 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs
4582 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as
4583 brace lists too. An example:
4584
4585 @example
4586 1: static char* ingredients[] =
4587 2: @{
4588 3: "Ham",
4589 4: "Salt",
4590 5: NULL
4591 6: @};
4592 @end example
4593
4594 @ssindex brace-list-open
4595 @ssindex brace-list-intro
4596 @ssindex brace-list-close
4597 @ssindex brace-list-entry
4598 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned
4599 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned
4600 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned
4601 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned
4602 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this
4603 initializer list.
4604
4605 @ssindex brace-entry-open
4606 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for
4607 example:
4608
4609 @example
4610 1: struct intpairs[] =
4611 2: @{
4612 3: @{ 1, 2 @},
4613 4: @{
4614 5: 3,
4615 6: 4
4616 7: @}
4617 8: @{ 1,
4618 9: 2 @},
4619 10: @{ 3, 4 @}
4620 11: @};
4621 @end example
4622
4623 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On
4624 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned
4625 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry
4626 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are
4627 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd
4628 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is
4629 line 10.
4630
4631 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4632 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4633 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4634 @subsection External Scope Symbols
4635 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4636
4637 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic
4638 symbols. In this example:
4639
4640 @example
4641 1: extern "C"
4642 2: @{
4643 3: int thing_one( int );
4644 4: int thing_two( double );
4645 5: @}
4646 @end example
4647
4648 @ssindex extern-lang-open
4649 @ssindex extern-lang-close
4650 @ssindex inextern-lang
4651 @ssindex inclass
4652 @noindent
4653 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given
4654 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields:
4655
4656 @example
4657 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14))
4658 @end example
4659
4660 @noindent
4661 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4662 @code{inclass}.
4663
4664 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4665 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4666 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4667 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4668 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4669
4670 @table @asis
4671 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang}
4672 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be
4673 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but
4674 that isn't the case for historical reasons.}
4675
4676 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace}
4677 @ssindex namespace-open
4678 @ssindex namespace-close
4679 @ssindex innamespace
4680 @code{namespace} blocks in C++.
4681
4682 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule}
4683 @ssindex module-open
4684 @ssindex module-close
4685 @ssindex inmodule
4686 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL.
4687
4688 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition}
4689 @ssindex composition-open
4690 @ssindex composition-close
4691 @ssindex incomposition
4692 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL.
4693 @end table
4694
4695 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4696 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4697 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4698 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols
4699 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4700
4701 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists,
4702 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function
4703 calls. This example illustrates these:
4704
4705 @example
4706 1: void a_function( int line1,
4707 2: int line2 );
4708 3:
4709 4: void a_longer_function(
4710 5: int line1,
4711 6: int line2
4712 7: );
4713 8:
4714 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 )
4715 10: @{
4716 11: a_function(
4717 12: line1,
4718 13: line2
4719 14: );
4720 15:
4721 16: a_longer_function( line1,
4722 17: line2 );
4723 18: @}
4724 @end example
4725
4726 @ssindex arglist-intro
4727 @ssindex arglist-close
4728 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are
4729 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are
4730 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis
4731 that closes the argument list.
4732
4733 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty
4734 @ssindex arglist-cont
4735 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic
4736 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17
4737 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means
4738 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the
4739 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open
4740 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned
4741 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens
4742 their argument lists is the last character on that line.
4743
4744 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro},
4745 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two
4746 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the
4747 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis.
4748 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up
4749 Functions}).
4750
4751 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any
4752 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line,
4753 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead.
4754
4755 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4756 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4757 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4758 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols
4759 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4760
4761 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously
4762 covered are illustrated by this C++ example:
4763
4764 @example
4765 1: void Bass::play( int volume )
4766 2: const
4767 3: @{
4768 4: /* this line starts a multiline
4769 5: * comment. This line should get 'c' syntax */
4770 6:
4771 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \
4772 8: string. This line should get 'string' syntax.";
4773 9:
4774 10: note:
4775 11: @{
4776 12: #ifdef LOCK
4777 13: Lock acquire();
4778 14: #endif // LOCK
4779 15: slap_pop();
4780 16: cout << "I played "
4781 17: << "a note\n";
4782 18: @}
4783 19: @}
4784 @end example
4785
4786 The lines to note in this example include:
4787
4788 @itemize @bullet
4789 @item
4790 @ssindex func-decl-cont
4791 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax.
4792
4793 @item
4794 @ssindex comment-intro
4795 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and}
4796 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with
4797 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point. It is always accompanied
4798 by another syntactic element which does have one.
4799
4800 @item
4801 @ssindex c
4802 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax.
4803
4804 @item
4805 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4806 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is
4807 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the
4808 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned
4809 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be
4810 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing
4811 code.
4812
4813 @item
4814 @ssindex string
4815 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax.
4816
4817 @item
4818 @ssindex label
4819 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax.
4820
4821 @item
4822 @ssindex block-open
4823 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement}
4824 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor
4825 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which
4826 does have one.
4827
4828 @item
4829 @ssindex cpp-macro
4830 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the
4831 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and
4832 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is
4833 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all
4834 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily
4835 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest
4836 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with
4837 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position.
4838
4839 @item
4840 @ssindex stream-op
4841 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4842 @end itemize
4843
4844 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4845 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4846 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4847 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols
4848 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4849
4850 @cindex multiline macros
4851 @cindex syntactic whitespace
4852 @ssindex cpp-define-intro
4853 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4854 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4855 other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4856 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4857 line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4858 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4859
4860 @example
4861 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \
4862 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \
4863 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \
4864 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \
4865 5: else
4866 @end example
4867
4868 @noindent
4869 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4870 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4871 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4872 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4873 code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4874 on line 5.
4875
4876 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
4877 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In
4878 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont}
4879 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp
4880 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed
4881 macros.}.
4882
4883 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros.
4884
4885 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4886 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Java Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4887 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4888 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols
4889 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4890
4891 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols
4892 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example
4893 illustrating these:
4894
4895 @example
4896 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject
4897 2: withStuff:stuff
4898 3: @{
4899 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self
4900 5: toDelegate:anObject
4901 6: withExtraStuff:stuff];
4902 7: @}
4903 @end example
4904
4905 @ssindex objc-method-intro
4906 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont
4907 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont
4908 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is
4909 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both
4910 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax.
4911
4912 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4913 @node Java Symbols, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4914 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4915 @subsection Java Symbols
4916 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4917
4918 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like
4919 this:
4920
4921 @example
4922 1: @@Test
4923 2: public void watch(Observable o) @{
4924 3: @@NonNull
4925 4: Observer obs = new Observer() @{
4926 5: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{
4927 6: history.addElement(arg);
4928 7: @}
4929 8: @};
4930 9: o.addObserver(obs);
4931 10: @}
4932 @end example
4933
4934 @ssindex inexpr-class
4935 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class.
4936 Lines 5 and 8 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the
4937 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be
4938 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to
4939 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't
4940 have an anchor position.
4941
4942 @ssindex annotation-top-cont
4943 @ssindex annotation-var-cont
4944 Line 2 is assigned the @code{annotation-top-cont} syntax, due to it being a
4945 continuation of a topmost introduction with an annotation symbol preceding
4946 the current line. Similarly, line 4 is assigned the @code{annotation-var-cont}
4947 syntax due to it being a continuation of a variable declaration where preceding
4948 the declaration is an annotation.
4949
4950 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4951 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Java Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
4952 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4953 @subsection Statement Block Symbols
4954 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
4955
4956 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside
4957 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for
4958 this, e.g.:
4959
4960 @example
4961 1: int res = (@{
4962 2: int y = foo (); int z;
4963 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y;
4964 4: z;
4965 5: @});
4966 @end example
4967
4968 @ssindex inexpr-statement
4969 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the
4970 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on
4971 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block
4972 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't
4973 contain an anchor position.
4974
4975 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside
4976 statements, as illustrated here:
4977
4978 @example
4979 1: array itgob()
4980 2: @{
4981 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..],
4982 4: lambda
4983 5: (mixed arg)
4984 6: @{
4985 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg);
4986 8: @}) * ", " + "\n";
4987 9: return catch @{
4988 10: write (s + "\n");
4989 11: @};
4990 12: @}
4991 @end example
4992
4993 @ssindex inlambda
4994 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont
4995 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes
4996 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put
4997 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont}
4998 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the
4999 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line
5000 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets
5001 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get
5002 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the
5003 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the
5004 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace
5005 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}.
5006
5007 @ssindex inexpr-statement
5008 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block
5009 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement
5010 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C
5011 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is
5012 handled like this too.
5013
5014 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5015 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols
5016 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5017 @subsection K&R Symbols
5018 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5019
5020 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5021 @ssindex knr-argdecl
5022 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5023 code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5024
5025 @example
5026 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
5027 2: int a;
5028 3: int b;
5029 4: int c;
5030 5: @{
5031 6: return a + b + c;
5032 7: @}
5033 @end example
5034
5035 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5036 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5037 (i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5038 syntax.
5039
5040
5041 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5042 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics
5043 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5044 @section Indentation Calculation
5045 @cindex indentation
5046 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5047
5048 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context
5049 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}).
5050
5051 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the
5052 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first
5053 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic
5054 element has an anchor position then column zero is used.
5055
5056 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up
5057 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable
5058 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic
5059 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are
5060 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation
5061 column.
5062
5063 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is
5064 our first example again:
5065
5066 @example
5067 1: void swap( int& a, int& b )
5068 2: @{
5069 3: int tmp = a;
5070 4: a = b;
5071 5: b = tmp;
5072 6: @}
5073 @end example
5074
5075 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent
5076 the line. The syntactic context for that line is:
5077
5078 @example
5079 ((defun-block-intro 29))
5080 @end example
5081
5082 @noindent
5083 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the
5084 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace
5085 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column.
5086
5087 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the
5088 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value
5089 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running
5090 total indentation of 4 spaces.
5091
5092 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line,
5093 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the
5094 line is 4 spaces.
5095
5096 Here's another example:
5097
5098 @example
5099 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5100 2: @{
5101 3: if( doit )
5102 4: @{
5103 5: return( val + incr );
5104 6: @}
5105 7: return( val );
5106 8: @}
5107 @end example
5108
5109 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same
5110 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic
5111 context. The context for this line is:
5112
5113 @example
5114 ((substatement-open 46))
5115 @end example
5116
5117 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in
5118 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that
5119 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the
5120 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it
5121 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an
5122 indentation for the line of 8 spaces.
5123
5124 Simple, huh?
5125
5126 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on
5127 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets.
5128 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story.
5129
5130 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to
5131 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation,
5132 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used.
5133
5134 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable
5135 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the
5136 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the
5137 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}.
5138
5139
5140 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5141 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top
5142 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5143 @chapter Customizing Indentation
5144 @cindex customization, indentation
5145 @cindex indentation
5146 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5147
5148 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style
5149 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an
5150 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and
5151 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The
5152 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the
5153 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its
5154 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}.
5155
5156 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in
5157 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of
5158 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5159
5160 @defopt c-basic-offset
5161 @vindex basic-offset (c-)
5162 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels.
5163 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it
5164 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for
5165 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles).
5166 @end defopt
5167
5168 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in
5169 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them),
5170 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one
5171 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).
5172
5173 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last
5174 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You
5175 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's
5176 indentation.
5177
5178 @menu
5179 * c-offsets-alist::
5180 * Interactive Customization::
5181 * Line-Up Functions::
5182 * Custom Line-Up::
5183 * Other Indentation::
5184 @end menu
5185
5186
5187 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5188 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation
5189 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5190 @section c-offsets-alist
5191 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5192
5193 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style
5194 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, the principal variable for configuring
5195 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to
5196 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}.
5197
5198 @defopt c-offsets-alist
5199 @vindex offsets-alist (c-)
5200 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic
5201 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line
5202 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic
5203 Analysis}.
5204
5205 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer
5206 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global
5207 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain
5208 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}.
5209
5210 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic
5211 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or
5212 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols:
5213 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The
5214 meanings of these values are described in detail below.
5215
5216 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some
5217 of these kinds of offsets:
5218
5219 @example
5220 ((statement . 0)
5221 (substatement . +)
5222 (cpp-macro . [0])
5223 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont)
5224 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5225 c-indent-multi-line-block))
5226 @dots{}
5227 @*)
5228 @end example
5229 @end defopt
5230
5231 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o})
5232 @findex set-offset (c-)
5233 @kindex C-c C-o
5234 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current
5235 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there
5236 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol.
5237
5238 You can use @code{c-set-offset} interactively within a @ccmode{}
5239 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings.
5240 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change
5241 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset
5242 (defaulting to the current offset).
5243
5244 @code{c-set-offset} takes two arguments when used programmatically:
5245 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset},
5246 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command
5247 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of
5248 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a
5249 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{}
5250 itself uses this function when initializing styles.
5251 @end deffn
5252
5253 @cindex offset specification
5254 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of
5255 the following:
5256
5257 @table @asis
5258 @item An integer
5259 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative
5260 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro
5261 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will
5262 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an
5263 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation
5264 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to
5265 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart
5266 from zero).
5267
5268 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}
5269 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of
5270 @code{c-basic-offset}:
5271
5272 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset},
5273 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level
5274 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the
5275 values that the special symbols correspond to:
5276
5277 @table @code
5278 @item +
5279 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1
5280 @item -
5281 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}1
5282 @item ++
5283 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2
5284 @item --
5285 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}2
5286 @item *
5287 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5
5288 @item /
5289 @code{c-basic-offset} times @minus{}0.5
5290 @end table
5291
5292 @item A vector
5293 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute
5294 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated
5295 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from
5296 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being
5297 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector
5298 beyond the first will be ignored.
5299
5300 @item A function or lambda expression
5301 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be
5302 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more
5303 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired
5304 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for
5305 details about them.
5306
5307 @item A symbol with a variable binding
5308 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes
5309 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is
5310 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a
5311 vector (an absolute offset).
5312
5313 @item A list
5314 The offset can also be a list containing several offset
5315 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list
5316 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up
5317 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in
5318 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the
5319 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value.
5320
5321 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined.
5322 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the
5323 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements:
5324
5325 @table @code
5326 @item first
5327 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent
5328 elements of the list don't get evaluated.
5329 @item min
5330 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5331 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5332 @item max
5333 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or
5334 absolute; they can't be mixed.
5335 @item add
5336 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be
5337 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets
5338 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case.
5339 @end table
5340
5341 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above
5342 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list
5343 will be combined according to the method @code{first}.
5344 @end table
5345
5346 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p
5347 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-)
5348 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative
5349 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable
5350 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an
5351 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since
5352 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return
5353 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave
5354 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}.
5355
5356 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5357 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation
5358 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5359 @section Interactive Customization
5360 @cindex customization, interactive
5361 @cindex interactive customization
5362 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5363
5364 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the
5365 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the
5366 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise
5367 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}:
5368
5369 @example
5370 @group
5371 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5372 2: @{
5373 3: if( doit )
5374 4: @{
5375 5: return( val + incr );
5376 6: @}
5377 7: return( val );
5378 8: @}
5379 @end group
5380 @end example
5381
5382 @noindent
5383 to:
5384
5385 @example
5386 @group
5387 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5388 2: @{
5389 3: if( doit )
5390 4: @{
5391 5: return( val + incr );
5392 6: @}
5393 7: return( val );
5394 8: @}
5395 @end group
5396 @end example
5397
5398 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a
5399 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the
5400 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we
5401 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line,
5402 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations
5403 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields:
5404
5405 @example
5406 ((substatement-open 44))
5407 @end example
5408
5409 @noindent
5410 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to
5411 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic
5412 symbol.
5413
5414 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts
5415 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default.
5416 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the
5417 syntactic symbol we want to change!
5418
5419 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new
5420 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this
5421 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter
5422 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the
5423 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}.
5424
5425 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q}
5426 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example
5427 should now look like:
5428
5429 @example
5430 @group
5431 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit )
5432 2: @{
5433 3: if( doit )
5434 4: @{
5435 5: return( val + incr );
5436 6: @}
5437 7: return( val );
5438 8: @}
5439 @end group
5440 @end example
5441
5442 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we
5443 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to
5444 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more
5445 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach
5446 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the
5447 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further
5448 adjustments.
5449
5450 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7)
5451 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset
5452 @findex set-offset (c-)
5453 @kindex C-c C-o
5454 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient
5455 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see
5456 the example above) and from your mode hook.
5457
5458 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the
5459 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset
5460 for that syntactic element.
5461 @end deffn
5462 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT.
5463
5464 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5465 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation
5466 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5467 @section Line-Up Functions
5468 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5469
5470 @cindex line-up function
5471 @cindex indentation function
5472 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic
5473 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you
5474 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening
5475 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{}
5476 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}.
5477
5478 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is
5479 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many
5480 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these
5481 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}.
5482 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a
5483 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
5484
5485 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested
5486 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
5487 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode.
5488
5489 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in
5490 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an
5491 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil},
5492 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case; try a
5493 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}.
5494
5495 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions,
5496 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For
5497 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates
5498 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with.
5499
5500 @macro workswith
5501 @emph{Works with:@ }
5502 @end macro
5503 @ifinfo
5504 @unmacro workswith
5505 @macro workswith
5506 Works with:
5507 @end macro
5508 @end ifinfo
5509
5510 @macro sssTBasicOffset
5511 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5512 @end macro
5513
5514 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset
5515 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c
5516 @end macro
5517
5518 @macro hereFn{func}
5519 <- @i{\func\}@c
5520 @end macro
5521
5522 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P
5523 @iftex
5524 @unmacro hereFn
5525 @macro hereFn{func}
5526 <-@i{\func\}@c
5527 @end macro
5528 @end iftex
5529
5530 @menu
5531 * Brace/Paren Line-Up::
5532 * List Line-Up::
5533 * Operator Line-Up::
5534 * Comment Line-Up::
5535 * Misc Line-Up::
5536 @end menu
5537
5538 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5539 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions
5540 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5541 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions
5542 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5543
5544 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces,
5545 parentheses and statements within brace blocks.
5546
5547 @defun c-lineup-close-paren
5548 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-)
5549 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the
5550 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no
5551 indentation is added. E.g.:
5552
5553 @example
5554 @group
5555 main (int,
5556 char **
5557 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5558 @end group
5559 @end example
5560
5561 @noindent
5562 and
5563
5564 @example
5565 @group
5566 main (
5567 int, char **
5568 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren}
5569 @end group
5570 @end example
5571
5572 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5573 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5574 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See
5575 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5576
5577 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols.
5578 @end defun
5579
5580 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5581
5582 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}
5583 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren
5584 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-)
5585 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function
5586 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the
5587 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with
5588 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all
5589 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren.
5590
5591 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the
5592 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is
5593 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further
5594 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure.
5595
5596 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on
5597 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and
5598 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
5599 @end defun
5600
5601 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5602
5603 @defun c-indent-one-line-block
5604 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-)
5605 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5606
5607 @example
5608 @group
5609 if (n > 0)
5610 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5611 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5612 @end group
5613 @end example
5614
5615 @noindent
5616 and
5617
5618 @example
5619 @group
5620 if (n > 0)
5621 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block}
5622 m+=n; n=0;
5623 @}
5624 @end group
5625 @end example
5626
5627 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5628 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block,
5629 which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5630
5631 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5632 @code{-open} symbols.
5633 @end defun
5634
5635 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5636
5637 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block
5638 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-)
5639 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g.:
5640
5641 @example
5642 @group
5643 int *foo[] = @{
5644 NULL,
5645 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5646 @end group
5647 @end example
5648
5649 @noindent
5650 and
5651
5652 @example
5653 @group
5654 int *foo[] = @{
5655 NULL,
5656 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block}
5657 17
5658 @},
5659 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5660 @end group
5661 @end example
5662
5663 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters.
5664 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline
5665 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions.
5666
5667 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the
5668 @code{-open} symbols.
5669 @end defun
5670
5671 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5672
5673 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements
5674 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-)
5675 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement
5676 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in
5677 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own
5678 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g.:
5679
5680 @example
5681 @group
5682 int main()
5683 @{ puts ("Hello!");
5684 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements}
5685 @}
5686 @end group
5687 @end example
5688
5689 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with,
5690 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list
5691 expressions.
5692
5693 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol.
5694 @end defun
5695
5696 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5697
5698 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5699 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5700 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5701 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5702 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5703 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5704 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
5705 construct.
5706
5707 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement},
5708 @code{inexpr-class}.
5709 @end defun
5710
5711 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5712
5713 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks
5714 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-)
5715 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way
5716 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks,
5717 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith
5718 style indentation. Consider the following examples:
5719
5720 @example
5721 @group
5722 int foo()
5723 @{
5724 a;
5725 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5726 @end group
5727 @end example
5728
5729 @example
5730 @group
5731 int foo()
5732 @{
5733 @{
5734 a;
5735 @}
5736 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks}
5737 @end group
5738 @end example
5739
5740 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style
5741 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect
5742 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the
5743 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x}
5744 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for
5745 @code{statement} was set simply to zero.
5746
5747 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the
5748 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead
5749 indents relative to the surrounding block just like
5750 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}.
5751
5752 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open},
5753 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}.
5754 @end defun
5755
5756 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5757
5758 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block
5759 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-)
5760 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way
5761 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g.:
5762
5763 @example
5764 @group
5765 something
5766 @{
5767 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5768 @}
5769 @end group
5770 @end example
5771
5772 @noindent
5773 and
5774
5775 @example
5776 @group
5777 something @{
5778 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}
5779 @}
5780 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5781 @end group
5782 @end example
5783
5784 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5785 @code{c-basic-offset} is added.
5786
5787 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro},
5788 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5789 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5790 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5791 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5792 and @code{inextern-lang}.
5793 @end defun
5794
5795 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5796 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
5797 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5798 @subsection List Line-Up Functions
5799 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
5800
5801 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
5802 form lists of items, usually separated by commas.
5803
5804 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly
5805 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines
5806 contained within parentheses.
5807
5808 @defun c-lineup-arglist
5809 @findex lineup-arglist (c-)
5810 Line up the current argument line under the first argument.
5811
5812 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open
5813 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is
5814 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in
5815 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g.:
5816
5817 @example
5818 @group
5819 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{
5820 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]);
5821 @});
5822 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5823 @end group
5824 @end example
5825
5826 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code
5827 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of
5828 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to
5829 indent such cases this way.
5830
5831 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}.
5832 @end defun
5833
5834 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5835
5836 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren
5837 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-)
5838 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or
5839 brace block.
5840
5841 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro},
5842 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro},
5843 @code{arglist-intro}.
5844 @end defun
5845
5846 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5847
5848 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher
5849 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-)
5850 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member
5851 initializers under each other. E.g.:
5852
5853 @example
5854 @group
5855 Foo::Foo (int a, int b):
5856 Cyphr (a),
5857 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5858 @end group
5859 @end example
5860
5861 @noindent
5862 and
5863
5864 @example
5865 @group
5866 class Foo
5867 : public Cyphr,
5868 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5869 @end group
5870 @end example
5871
5872 @noindent
5873 and
5874
5875 @example
5876 @group
5877 Foo::Foo (int a, int b)
5878 : Cyphr (a)
5879 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher}
5880 @end group
5881 @end example
5882
5883 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}.
5884 @end defun
5885
5886 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5887
5888 @defun c-lineup-java-inher
5889 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-)
5890 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names
5891 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends}
5892 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are
5893 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword.
5894 E.g.:
5895
5896 @example
5897 @group
5898 class Foo
5899 extends
5900 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5901 @sssTBasicOffset{}
5902 @end group
5903 @end example
5904
5905 @noindent
5906 and
5907
5908 @example
5909 @group
5910 class Foo
5911 extends Cyphr,
5912 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher}
5913 @end group
5914 @end example
5915
5916 @workswith @code{inher-cont}.
5917 @end defun
5918
5919 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5920
5921 @defun c-lineup-java-throws
5922 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-)
5923 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the
5924 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other.
5925 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the
5926 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself
5927 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration
5928 start if it doesn't hang. E.g.:
5929
5930 @example
5931 @group
5932 int foo()
5933 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5934 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5935 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{}
5936 @end group
5937 @end example
5938
5939 @noindent
5940 and
5941
5942 @example
5943 @group
5944 int foo() throws Cyphr,
5945 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5946 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws}
5947 @end group
5948 @end example
5949
5950 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}.
5951 @end defun
5952
5953 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5954
5955 @defun c-lineup-template-args
5956 @findex lineup-template-args (c-)
5957 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but
5958 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the
5959 opening @samp{<}.
5960
5961 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is
5962 returned if there's no template argument on the first line.
5963
5964 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}.
5965 @end defun
5966
5967 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5968
5969 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call
5970 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-)
5971 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does
5972 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver,
5973 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line
5974 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are
5975 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so
5976 lineup the current line with it.
5977
5978 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}.
5979 @end defun
5980
5981 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5982
5983 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args
5984 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-)
5985 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon
5986 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line.
5987
5988 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5989 @end defun
5990
5991 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
5992
5993 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2
5994 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-)
5995 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on
5996 the current line with the colon on the previous line.
5997
5998 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}.
5999 @end defun
6000
6001 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6002 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6003 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6004 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions
6005 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6006
6007 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which
6008 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous
6009 line.
6010
6011 @defun c-lineup-argcont
6012 @findex lineup-argcont (c-)
6013 Line up a continued argument. E.g.:
6014
6015 @example
6016 @group
6017 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc
6018 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont}
6019 @end group
6020 @end example
6021
6022 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on
6023 lines which are the start of an argument.
6024
6025 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument
6026 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the
6027 expressions for the operands.
6028
6029 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6030 @end defun
6031
6032 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6033
6034 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators
6035 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-)
6036 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren.
6037 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave
6038 those cases to other line-up functions. Example:
6039
6040 @example
6041 @group
6042 if ( x < 10
6043 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators}
6044 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}}
6045 )
6046 @end group
6047 @end example
6048
6049 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6050 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6051 settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6052 suggestion to get a consistent style):
6053
6054 @example
6055 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont
6056 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0))
6057 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
6058 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist))
6059 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close
6060 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren))
6061 @end example
6062
6063 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6064 @end defun
6065
6066 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6067
6068 @defun c-lineup-assignments
6069 @findex lineup-assignments (c-)
6070 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line
6071 in the statement. If there isn't any, return @code{nil} to allow stacking with
6072 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment
6073 operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6074
6075 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6076 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6077
6078 @end defun
6079
6080 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6081
6082 @defun c-lineup-math
6083 @findex lineup-math (c-)
6084 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6085 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6086 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6087 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6088
6089 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6090 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6091 @end defun
6092
6093 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6094
6095 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls
6096 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-)
6097 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with
6098 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more
6099 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up
6100 with the first of those tokens. E.g.:
6101
6102 @example
6103 @group
6104 r = proc->add(17)->add(18)
6105 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls}
6106 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}}
6107 @end group
6108 @end example
6109
6110 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list
6111 expressions.
6112
6113 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6114 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6115 @end defun
6116
6117 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6118
6119 @defun c-lineup-streamop
6120 @findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6121 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6122
6123 @workswith @code{stream-op}.
6124 @end defun
6125
6126 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6127
6128 @defun c-lineup-string-cont
6129 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-)
6130 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued
6131 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after
6132 another one. E.g.:
6133
6134 @example
6135 @group
6136 result = prefix + "A message "
6137 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont}
6138 @end group
6139 @end example
6140
6141 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other
6142 lineup functions.
6143
6144 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont},
6145 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6146 @end defun
6147
6148
6149 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6150 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6151 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6152 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions
6153 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6154
6155 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types
6156 of comment structure.
6157
6158 @defun c-lineup-C-comments
6159 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-)
6160 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used
6161 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6162
6163 @example
6164 @group
6165 /* /** /*
6166 * text * text text
6167 */ */ */
6168 @end group
6169 @end example
6170
6171 @example
6172 @group
6173 /* text /* /**
6174 text ** text ** text
6175 */ */ */
6176 @end group
6177 @end example
6178
6179 @example
6180 @group
6181 /**************************************************
6182 * text
6183 *************************************************/
6184 @end group
6185 @end example
6186
6187 @vindex comment-start-skip
6188 @example
6189 @group
6190 /**************************************************
6191 Free form text comments:
6192 In comments with a long delimiter line at the
6193 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines
6194 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The
6195 delimiter line is whatever matches the
6196 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp.
6197 **************************************************/
6198 @end group
6199 @end example
6200
6201 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6202 the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6203 line inside a comment.
6204
6205 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
6206 @end defun
6207
6208 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6209
6210 @defun c-lineup-comment
6211 @findex lineup-comment (c-)
6212 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable
6213 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a
6214 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved.
6215
6216 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset
6217 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-)
6218 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can
6219 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form
6220
6221 @example
6222 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}})
6223 @end example
6224
6225 @noindent
6226 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to
6227 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount
6228 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value
6229 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}.
6230 @end defopt
6231
6232 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6233 @end defun
6234
6235 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6236
6237 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment
6238 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-)
6239 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is
6240 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the
6241 block. E.g.:
6242
6243 @example
6244 @group
6245 int main()
6246 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment}
6247 @{
6248 return 0;
6249 @}
6250 @end group
6251 @end example
6252
6253 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list
6254 expressions.
6255
6256 @workswith @code{comment-intro}.
6257 @end defun
6258
6259 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6260 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions
6261 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6262 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions
6263 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6264
6265 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into
6266 any earlier category.
6267
6268 @defun c-lineup-dont-change
6269 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-)
6270 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it
6271 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups.
6272
6273 @workswith Any syntactic symbol.
6274 @end defun
6275
6276 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6277
6278 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define
6279 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-)
6280 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the
6281 construct preceding the macro. E.g.:
6282
6283 @example
6284 @group
6285 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6286 \"Some text.\";
6287
6288 #define X(A, B) \
6289 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6290 printf (A, B); \
6291 @} while (0)
6292 @end group
6293 @end example
6294
6295 @noindent
6296 and:
6297
6298 @example
6299 @group
6300 int dribble() @{
6301 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}}
6302 error(\"Not running!\");
6303
6304 #define X(A, B) \
6305 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6306 printf (A, B); \
6307 @} while (0)
6308 @end group
6309 @end example
6310
6311 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6312 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6313 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6314 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6315 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6316 on the @samp{#define} line:
6317
6318 @example
6319 @group
6320 const char msg[] =
6321 \"Some text.\";
6322
6323 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6324 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6325 this->refs++; \
6326 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6327 @end group
6328 @end example
6329
6330 @noindent
6331 and:
6332
6333 @example
6334 @group
6335 int dribble() @{
6336 if (!running)
6337 error(\"Not running!\");
6338
6339 #define X(A, B) do @{ \
6340 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6341 this->refs++; \
6342 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define}
6343 @end group
6344 @end example
6345
6346 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero
6347 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They
6348 are then added to the two column indentation that
6349 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here.
6350
6351 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned
6352 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default
6353 indentation on the top level.
6354
6355 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this
6356 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring
6357 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest
6358 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the
6359 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as
6360 described above.
6361
6362 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}.
6363 @end defun
6364
6365 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6366
6367 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
6368 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-)
6369 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line.
6370
6371 @example
6372 @group
6373 asm ("foo %1, %0\n"
6374 "bar %0, %1"
6375 : "=r" (w),
6376 "=r" (x)
6377 : "0" (y),
6378 "1" (z));
6379 @end group
6380 @end example
6381
6382 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6383 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}.
6384
6385 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6386 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6387 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6388 arglist lineups, e.g.:
6389
6390 @example
6391 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
6392 @end example
6393
6394 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}.
6395 @end defun
6396
6397 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------
6398
6399 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont
6400 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-)
6401 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation
6402 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of
6403 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so
6404 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or
6405 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but
6406 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a
6407 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is
6408 added to the indentation. E.g.:
6409
6410 @example
6411 @group
6412 int
6413 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6414 @{
6415 return -i;
6416 @}
6417 @end group
6418 @end example
6419
6420 @noindent
6421 and
6422
6423 @example
6424 @group
6425 struct
6426 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6427 @{
6428 double height;
6429 @}
6430 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6431 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6432 @sssTBasicOffset{}
6433 @end group
6434 @end example
6435
6436 @noindent
6437 and
6438
6439 @example
6440 @group
6441 struct larch
6442 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6443 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont}
6444 @end group
6445 @end example
6446
6447 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}.
6448 @end defun
6449
6450 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6451 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation
6452 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6453 @section Custom Line-Up Functions
6454 @cindex customization, indentation functions
6455 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6456
6457 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom
6458 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic
6459 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want,
6460 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function
6461 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}).
6462
6463 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions,
6464 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good
6465 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up
6466 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up
6467 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these
6468 predefined functions, which can be found in the file
6469 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you
6470 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it;
6471 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.
6472
6473 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic
6474 element (see below). At the time of the call, point will be somewhere
6475 on the line being indented. The return value is a
6476 @code{c-offsets-alist} offset specification: for example, an integer,
6477 a symbol such as @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning
6478 @code{nil} is useful when the offset specification for a syntactic
6479 element is a list containing the line-up function
6480 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even another line-up function. Full
6481 details of these are in @ref{c-offsets-alist}.
6482
6483 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6484 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6485 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6486 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6487
6488 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
6489 a cons cell of the form
6490
6491 @example
6492 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}})
6493 @end example
6494
6495 @noindent
6496 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the
6497 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2.
6498 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was
6499 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any)
6500 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol
6501 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic
6502 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and
6503 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to
6504 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we
6505 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare
6506 your setup for this by using the access functions
6507 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.)@: described below.
6508
6509 @vindex c-syntactic-element
6510 @vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6511 @vindex c-syntactic-context
6512 @vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6513 Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6514 info in the syntactic element: typically other positions that can be
6515 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6516 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
6517 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element},
6518 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The
6519 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful: it gets
6520 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom
6521 Braces}.
6522
6523 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic
6524 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to
6525 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form
6526 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in
6527 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are:
6528
6529 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem
6530 @findex langelem-sym (c-)
6531 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}.
6532 @end defun
6533
6534 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem
6535 @findex langelem-pos (c-)
6536 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there is none.
6537 @end defun
6538
6539 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point
6540 @findex langelem-col (c-)
6541 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move
6542 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is
6543 non-@code{nil}.
6544 @end defun
6545
6546 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem
6547 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-)
6548 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there
6549 is none.
6550
6551 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if
6552 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is
6553 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from
6554 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}.
6555 @end defun
6556
6557 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and
6558 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a
6559 custom line-up function associated with it.
6560
6561 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6562 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation
6563 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6564 @section Other Special Indentations
6565 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6566
6567 To configure macros which you invoke without a terminating @samp{;},
6568 see @xref{Macros with ;}.
6569
6570 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation:
6571
6572 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation
6573 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-)
6574 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is
6575 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is
6576 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1.
6577
6578 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum
6579 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-)
6580 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum
6581 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to
6582 work.
6583 @end defopt
6584
6585 @defopt c-special-indent-hook
6586 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-)
6587 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after
6588 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if
6589 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by
6590 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function
6591 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments
6592 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors
6593 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it
6594 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom
6595 Line-Up}).
6596
6597 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6598 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6599 (i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6600 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6601 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6602 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6603 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6604 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
6605 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}.
6606
6607 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled
6608 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add
6609 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}.
6610 @end defopt
6611
6612
6613 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6614 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top
6615 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6616 @chapter Customizing Macros
6617 @cindex macros
6618 @cindex preprocessor directives
6619 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6620
6621 Preprocessor macros in C, C++, and Objective C (introduced by
6622 @code{#define}) have a syntax different from the main language---for
6623 example, a macro declaration is not terminated by a semicolon, and if
6624 it is more than a line long, line breaks in it must be escaped with
6625 backslashes. @ccmode{} has some commands to manipulate these, see
6626 @ref{Macro Backslashes}.
6627
6628 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to
6629 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior
6630 by setting the following user option:
6631
6632 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros
6633 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-)
6634 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this
6635 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as
6636 @code{cpp-macro-cont}.
6637 @end defopt
6638
6639 Because a macro can expand into anything at all, near where one is
6640 invoked @ccmode{} can only indent and fontify code heuristically.
6641 Sometimes it gets it wrong. Usually you should try to design your
6642 macros so that they ''look like ordinary code'' when you invoke them.
6643 However, two situations are so common that @ccmode{} handles them
6644 specially: that is when certain macros needn't (or mustn't) be
6645 followed by a @samp{;}, and when certain macros (or compiler
6646 directives) expand to nothing. You need to configure @ccmode{} to
6647 handle these macros properly, see @ref{Macros with ;} and @ref{Noise
6648 Macros}.
6649
6650 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6651 @menu
6652 * Macro Backslashes::
6653 * Macros with ;::
6654 * Noise Macros::
6655 @end menu
6656
6657 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6658 @node Macro Backslashes, Macros with ;, Custom Macros, Custom Macros
6659 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6660 @section Customizing Macro Backslashes
6661 @cindex @code{#define}
6662 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6663
6664 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation
6665 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is
6666 customized with these variables:
6667
6668 @defopt c-backslash-column
6669 @vindex backslash-column (c-)
6670 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column
6671 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-)
6672 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6673 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6674 automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6675 e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6676
6677 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6678 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6679 next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6680 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6681 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6682 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
6683 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too
6684 long ``stick out'' instead.
6685
6686 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable
6687 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6688 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}.
6689 @end defopt
6690
6691 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes
6692 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6693 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6694 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6695 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6696 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6697 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6698
6699 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically
6700 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes
6701 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command
6702 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}).
6703 @end defopt
6704
6705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6706 @node Macros with ;, Noise Macros, Macro Backslashes, Custom Macros
6707 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6708 @section Macros with semicolons
6709 @cindex macros with semicolons
6710 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6711 Macros which needn't (or mustn't) be followed by a semicolon when you
6712 invoke them, @dfn{macros with semicolons}, are very common. These can
6713 cause @ccmode{} to parse the next line wrongly as a
6714 @code{statement-cont} (@pxref{Function Symbols}) and thus mis-indent
6715 it.
6716
6717 You can prevent this by specifying which macros have semicolons. It
6718 doesn't matter whether or not such a macro has a parameter list:
6719
6720 @defopt c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6721 @vindex macro-names-with-semicolon (c-)
6722 This buffer-local variable specifies which macros have semicolons.
6723 After setting its value, you need to call
6724 @code{c-make-macro-with-semi-re} for it to take effect. It should be
6725 set to one of these values:
6726
6727 @table @asis
6728 @item nil
6729 There are no macros with semicolons.
6730 @item a list of strings
6731 Each string is the name of a macro with a semicolon. Only valid
6732 @code{#define} names are allowed here. For example, to set the
6733 default value, you could write the following into your @file{.emacs}:
6734
6735 @example
6736 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6737 '("Q_OBJECT" "Q_PROPERTY" "Q_DECLARE" "Q_ENUMS"))
6738 @end example
6739
6740 @item a regular expression
6741 This matches each symbol which is a macro with a semicolon. It must
6742 not match any string which isn't a valid @code{#define} name. For
6743 example:
6744
6745 @example
6746 (setq c-macro-names-with-semicolon
6747 "\\<\\(CLEAN_UP_AND_RETURN\\|Q_[[:upper:]]+\\)\\>")
6748 @end example
6749 @end table
6750 @end defopt
6751
6752 @defun c-make-macro-with-semi-re
6753 @findex make-macro-with-semi-re (c-)
6754 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6755 each time you change the value of
6756 @code{c-macro-names-with-semicolon}. It takes no arguments, and its
6757 return value has no meaning. This function is called by @ccmode{}'s
6758 initialization code.
6759 @end defun
6760
6761 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6762 @node Noise Macros, , Macros with ;, Custom Macros
6763 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6764 @section Noise Macros
6765 @cindex noise macros
6766 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6767
6768 In @ccmode{}, @dfn{noise macros} are macros which expand to nothing,
6769 or compiler directives (such as GCC's @code{__attribute__}) which play
6770 no part in the syntax of the C (etc.) language. Some noise macros are
6771 followed by arguments in parentheses (possibly optionally), others
6772 are not.
6773
6774 Noise macros can easily confuse @ccmode{}'s analysis of function
6775 headers, causing them to be mis-fontified, or even mis-indented. You
6776 can prevent this confusion by specifying the identifiers which
6777 constitute noise macros.
6778
6779 @defopt c-noise-macro-names
6780 @vindex noise-macro-names (c-)
6781 This variable is a list of names of noise macros which never have
6782 parenthesized arguments. Each element is a string, and must be a
6783 valid identifier. An element in @code{c-noise-macro-names} must not
6784 also be in @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names}. Such an element is
6785 treated as whitespace by @ccmode{}.
6786 @end defopt
6787
6788 @defopt c-noise-macro-with-parens-names
6789 @vindex noise-macro-with-parens-names (c-)
6790 This variable is a list of names of noise macros which optionally have
6791 arguments in parentheses. Each element of the list is a string, and
6792 must be a valid identifier. An element in
6793 @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names} must not also be in
6794 @code{c-noise-macro-names}. For performance reasons, such an element,
6795 together with the optional parenthesized arguments, is specially
6796 handled, but it is only handled when used in declaration
6797 contexts@footnote{If this restriction causes your project
6798 difficulties, please get in touch with @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}.}.
6799
6800 The two compiler directives @code{__attribute__} and @code{__declspec}
6801 have traditionally been handled specially in @ccmode{}; for example
6802 they are fontified with font-lock-keyword-face. You don't need to
6803 include these directives in @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names},
6804 but doing so is OK.
6805 @end defopt
6806
6807 @defun c-make-noise-macro-regexps
6808 @findex make-noise-macro-regexps (c-)
6809 Call this (non-interactive) function, which sets internal variables,
6810 after changing the value of @code{c-noise-macro-names} or
6811 @code{c-noise-macro-with-parens-names} (e.g. in a hook (@pxref{CC
6812 Hooks})). This function is called by @ccmode{}'s initialization code.
6813 @end defun
6814
6815 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6816 @node Odds and Ends, Sample Init File, Custom Macros, Top
6817 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6818 @chapter Odds and Ends
6819 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6820
6821 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here.
6822
6823 @defopt c-require-final-newline
6824 @vindex require-final-newline (c-)
6825 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved.
6826 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies
6827 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving
6828 Buffers,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a
6829 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch
6830 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language.
6831
6832 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the
6833 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines.
6834 These are C, C++ and Objective-C.
6835 @end defopt
6836
6837 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p
6838 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-)
6839 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown
6840 in the echo area when it's indented (unless
6841 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when
6842 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you
6843 want.
6844 @end defopt
6845
6846 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors
6847 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-)
6848 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and
6849 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there
6850 is no corresponding @code{if}.
6851
6852 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for
6853 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can
6854 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct
6855 anchoring position to indent the line in that case.
6856 @end defopt
6857
6858
6859 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6860 @node Sample Init File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top
6861 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6862 @appendix Sample Init File
6863 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6864
6865 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way.
6866 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want
6867 to change some of the actual values.
6868
6869 @verbatim
6870 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in
6871 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on,
6872 ;; inherit from it.
6873 (defun my-c-initialization-hook ()
6874 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break))
6875 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook)
6876
6877 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style
6878 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol
6879 ;; made by a style.
6880 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++)))
6881
6882 ;; Create my personal style.
6883 (defconst my-c-style
6884 '((c-tab-always-indent . t)
6885 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4)
6886 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after)
6887 (brace-list-open)))
6888 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before)
6889 (inher-intro)
6890 (case-label after)
6891 (label after)
6892 (access-label after)))
6893 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator
6894 empty-defun-braces
6895 defun-close-semi))
6896 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist)
6897 (substatement-open . 0)
6898 (case-label . 4)
6899 (block-open . 0)
6900 (knr-argdecl-intro . -)))
6901 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t))
6902 "My C Programming Style")
6903 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style)
6904
6905 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode.
6906 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook ()
6907 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer
6908 (c-set-style "PERSONAL")
6909 ;; other customizations
6910 (setq tab-width 8
6911 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs
6912 indent-tabs-mode nil)
6913 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete
6914 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1))
6915 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook)
6916 @end verbatim
6917
6918 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6919 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample Init File, Top
6920 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6921 @appendix Performance Issues
6922 @cindex performance
6923 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
6924
6925 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here.
6926
6927 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often,
6928 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large
6929 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such
6930 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6931 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6932 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6933
6934 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6935 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6936 I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6937 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6938 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6939 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
6940 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances
6941 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting
6942 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section.
6943
6944 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current
6945 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in
6946 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest
6947 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan
6948 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The
6949 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it
6950 gets.
6951
6952 @findex beginning-of-defun
6953 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6954 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6955 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6956 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6957 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
6958 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by
6959 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal,
6960 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file.
6961
6962 @findex defun-prompt-regexp
6963 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp
6964 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-)
6965 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common
6966 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the
6967 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs
6968 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant
6969 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular
6970 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In
6971 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This
6972 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason,
6973 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set
6974 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event,
6975 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow
6976 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a
6977 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way!
6978
6979 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks
6980 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved
6981 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to
6982 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long
6983 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the
6984 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks''
6985 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache
6986 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the
6987 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts.
6988
6989 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p
6990 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-)
6991 XEmacs users can set the variable
6992 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This
6993 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6994 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6995 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6996 styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6997 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6998 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6999 Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
7000 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable
7001 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should
7002 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect
7003 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
7004 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
7005
7006 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
7007 i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
7008 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
7009 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
7010 edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
7011
7012 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
7013 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
7014 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
7015 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
7016 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
7017 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
7018 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
7019
7020 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the
7021 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration}
7022 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible
7023 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for
7024 more info.
7025
7026
7027 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7028 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top
7029 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7030 @appendix Limitations and Known Bugs
7031 @cindex limitations
7032 @cindex bugs
7033 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7034
7035 @itemize @bullet
7036 @item
7037 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences
7038 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time
7039 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs,
7040 and are now utterly obsolete.)
7041
7042 @item
7043 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines})
7044 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive
7045 editing.
7046
7047 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as
7048 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With
7049 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only
7050 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
7051 intention to change this goal.
7052
7053 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7054 other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7055 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7056 @ccmode{}.
7057
7058 @item
7059 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7060 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7061 it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7062 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7063 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7064
7065 @item
7066 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function
7067 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming
7068 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at
7069 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been
7070 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file
7071 might be incorrectly indented or fontified.
7072
7073 @item
7074 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears:
7075
7076 @example
7077 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3)
7078 @end example
7079
7080 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some
7081 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic
7082 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a
7083 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly
7084 early on:
7085
7086 @example
7087 (defun my-load-cc-fonts ()
7088 (require "cc-fonts"))
7089 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts)
7090 @end example
7091 @end itemize
7092
7093 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7094 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top
7095 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7096 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions
7097 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7098
7099 @itemize @bullet
7100 @item
7101 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?}
7102
7103 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}.
7104
7105 @item
7106 @kindex RET
7107 @kindex C-j
7108 @emph{Why does/doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?}
7109
7110 Emacs's convention used to be that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that
7111 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. In Emacs-24.4, this convention was
7112 reversed.
7113
7114 If you use an older Emacs and you want @kbd{RET} do this
7115 too, add this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7116
7117 @example
7118 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)
7119 @end example
7120
7121 @xref{Getting Started}. This was a very common question.
7122
7123 @item
7124 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
7125
7126 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting
7127 Started}.
7128
7129 @item
7130 @kindex C-x h
7131 @kindex C-M-\
7132 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?}
7133
7134 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit
7135 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}.
7136
7137 @item
7138 @kindex C-M-q
7139 @kindex C-M-u
7140 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?}
7141
7142 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then
7143 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation
7144 Commands}.
7145
7146 @item
7147 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my
7148 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s
7149 function definition is void. What's wrong?}
7150
7151 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs
7152 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most
7153 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the
7154 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it
7155 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply
7156 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly:
7157
7158 @example
7159 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0)))
7160 @end example
7161
7162 @item
7163 @cindex open paren in column zero
7164 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or
7165 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or
7166 indentation to go haywire. What gives?}
7167
7168 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always
7169 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any
7170 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages).
7171 @ifset XEMACS
7172 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details.
7173 @end ifset
7174 @ifclear XEMACS
7175 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details
7176 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual).
7177 @end ifclear
7178
7179 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in
7180 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs
7181 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable
7182 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so
7183 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks.
7184
7185 @end itemize
7186
7187
7188 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7189 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top
7190 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7191 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release
7192 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7193
7194 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and
7195 of XEmacs since 19.16.
7196
7197 @cindex web site
7198 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen
7199 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the
7200 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen
7201 compatibility, etc.@: are all available on the web site:
7202
7203 @quotation
7204 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/}
7205 @end quotation
7206
7207
7208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7209 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top
7210 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7211 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports
7212 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7213
7214 @kindex C-c C-b
7215 @findex c-submit-bug-report
7216 @findex submit-bug-report (c-)
7217 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to
7218 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information
7219 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise,
7220 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to
7221 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include
7222 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure
7223 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7224 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7225
7226 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7227 customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7228 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7229 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7230 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
7231 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report.
7232
7233 @cindex bug report mailing list
7234 Reporting a bug using @code{c-submit-bug-report} files it in
7235 the GNU Bug Tracker at @url{http://debbugs.gnu.org}, then sends it on
7236 to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can also send reports, other
7237 questions, and suggestions (kudos?@: @t{;-)} to that address. It's a
7238 mailing list which you can join or browse an archive of; see the web site at
7239 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for further details.
7240
7241 @cindex announcement mailing list
7242 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the
7243 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to
7244 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible
7245 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted
7246 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs},
7247 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++},
7248 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools},
7249 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}.
7250 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-(
7251
7252
7253 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top
7254 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7255 @include doclicense.texi
7256
7257
7258 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27.
7259 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7260 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
7261 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7262 @unnumbered Command and Function Index
7263 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7264
7265 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string
7266 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7267 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7268 @iftex
7269 @sp 2
7270 @end iftex
7271 @printindex fn
7272
7273
7274 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7275 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top
7276 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7277 @unnumbered Variable Index
7278 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7279
7280 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string
7281 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its
7282 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name.
7283 @iftex
7284 @sp 2
7285 @end iftex
7286 @printindex vr
7287
7288
7289 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7290 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top
7291 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7292 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index
7293 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7294
7295 @printindex cp
7296
7297
7298 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7299 @comment Epilogue.
7300 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
7301
7302 @bye